chevrolet optra manual
TRANSCRIPT
FOREWORD
This manual will acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your new vehicle.It will also provide you with important safety information. Read it carefully and followthe recommendations for the enjoyable, safe, and trouble-free operation of your vehicle.
Service will best be provided by your authorised Chevrolet repairer who knows yourvehicle best and is dedicated to your complete satisfaction.
Please consider this manual a permanent part of your new car. It should remain withthe vehicle at all times, including at time of resale.
Thank you for choosing Chevrolet.
WARNING
WARNING indicates a potentially haz-ardous situation which, if not avoided,could result in serious injury or death.
IMPORTANT NOTICEPlease read this manual and follow the in-structions carefully.
: This is the safety alert symbol usedto alert you to potential hazards in-cluding injuries or damage to yourvehicle or other property. Obey allsafety messages that follow this sym-bol.
Throughout this manual, you will find spe-cial notations:
• Warning
• Caution
• Note
CAUTION
CAUTION indicates a potentiallyhazardous situation which, if notavoided, may result in minor or moder-ate injuries, or damage to yourvehicle or other property.
* or (option): The asterisk and (option) inthis manual signify an item of equipmentthat is not included on all vehicles. Suchitems include engine options, modelvariations specific to one country, andoptional equipment.
All information, illustrations, and specifica-tions in this manual are based on the latestproduct information available at the timeof publication.
We reserve the right to change specificationsor designs at any time without notice andwithout incurring obligation.
NOTE
NOTE indicates information which willassist you with maintenance or otherinstructions concerning your vehicle.
This vehicle may not comply with the stan-dards or regulations of other countries. Be-fore attempting to register this vehicle in anyother country, check all applicable regula-tions and make any necessary modifica-tions.
This manual describes the options and trimsavailable at the time of publica-tion. Some of the items covered maynot apply to your vehicle. Contact yourauthorised Chevrolet distributor for infor-mation on option and trim availability.
Non-genuine parts and accessories have notbeen examined or approved by our com-pany. We can certify neither the suitabilitynor the safety of non-genuine parts and ac-cessories and are not liable for damagecaused by their use.
Important: Read Section 1 ("Seats andOccupant Protection Systems") of thismanual fully and carefully before operat-ing your vehicle.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. SEATS AND OCCUPANT PROTECTION SYSTEMS ................................................................................ 1-1(Important information about safety belts, air bags, child seats and other safety features)
2. INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS ........................................................................................................... 2-1(Information about instruments, gauges and vehicle controls)
3. DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE ...................................................................................................................... 3-1(Information about how to drive your vehicle under various conditions.)
4. CLIMATE CONTROL AND AUDIO SYSTEM ......................................................................................... 4-1(How to operate your heating, ventilation, air conditioning and audio systems)
5. EMERGENCIES ......................................................................................................................................... 5-1(Important information about what to do if you have a problem while driving)
6. SERVICE AND VEHICLE CARE. ............................................................................................................. 6-1(Information about how to properly maintain your vehicle.)
7. VEHICLE MAINTENANCE ....................................................................................................................... 7-1(Information about vehicle maintenance)
8. TECHNICAL INFORMATION .................................................................................................................. 8-1(Vehicle specifications, lubricant types and other useful information)
9. INDEX ...................................................................................................................................................... 9-1
SEATS AND OCCUPANT PROTECTION SYSTEMS 1–1
SEATS AND OCCUPANTPROTECTION SYSTEMS1
• ALWAYS WEAR YOUR SAFETY BELTS ................... 1-2
• FRONT SEAT OCCUPANTS ................................... 1-6
• REAR SEAT OCCUPANTS ...................................... 1-6
• SAFETY BELT WARNING CHIME ........................... 1-6
• THREE-POINT SAFETY BELTS ............................... 1-6
• SAFETY BELT PRETENSIONER ............................... 1-9
• SAFETY BELT HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT ................. 1-10
• PREGNANT WOMEN AND SAFETY BELTS ......... 1-11
• CHILD RESTRAINT .............................................. 1-11
• LOWER CHILD RESTRAINT ANCHORS .............. 1-13
• HEAD RESTRAINTS ............................................. 1-15
• FRONT SEATS ..................................................... 1-16
• REAR SEATS ......................................................... 1-18
• SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM(AIR BAG) ............................................................ 1-19
1–2 SEATS AND OCCUPANT PROTECTION SYSTEMS
WARNING
• Safety belts have been shown to bethe single most effective protectionagainst injury or death in a vehicularaccident!
• As the owner and driver of your ve-hicle, you must make certain that eachoccupant is properly wearing thesafety belt provided at the seating po-sition.
• Pregnant women, injured, and physi-cally impaired persons should alsowear safety belts. Like all other occu-pants, they are more likely to sufferserious injury or death, if they do notdo so.
• The best way to protect the foetus isto protect the mother.
• Why safety belts work, how to wearthem, and how to adjust your seatposition properly, is explained in thissection. Read all of the informationprovided and always observe theseinstructions and warnings in order togain the full benefit of these safetysystems.
ALWAYS WEAR YOUR SAFETYBELTS!Occupant protection has been the focus ofmuch private and public research and de-velopment for many years. The two vehiclecomponents which are incorporated intothe vehicle solely for the protection of theoccupants in vehicle accidents are the safetybelts provided at each seating position andthe supplemental restraint system, or airbags, provided at the driver and front pas-senger seat positions. The safety belts canprotect you and your passengers only ifthey are used. The air bag is a supplemen-tal protective device that is more effectiveand safer as a restraining device when thesafety belts are being used.
WHY WEAR SAFETY BELTS?
Safety belts are helpful for several distinctreasons:
1) Safety belts attach the occupants to thevehicle so that they will not be ejectedduring an accident.
2) Safety belts attach the occupant to thevehicle so that they can use the spacebetween their pre-crash seating positionand the front of the vehicle to slowdown to a stop more gradually, as theirsafety belts stretch and the front end ofthe vehicle absorbs the energy of thecrash by crumpling.
3) Safety belts keep the driver in his seat,so that the driver might have a chanceto regain control in certain accident situ-ations.
4) Safety belts keep occupants from beingcatapulted into and injuring the driverand other occupants.
SEATS AND OCCUPANT PROTECTION SYSTEMS 1–3
WHY SAFETY BELTS WORK!
Safety belts cannot work unless they areworn and worn properly.
Vehicle occupants are injured if the forcesapplied to the body’s structures are greaterthan the body can tolerate without beinginjured. If a person’s body is stoppedabruptly, the forces applied to the body willbe high, whereas if the body is sloweddown gradually over some distance, theforces will be much lower. Thus, in orderto protect an occupant from injury in acrash, the idea is to give the person as muchtime and distance as possible in coming toa stop.
Imagine a person running at 15 miles perhour (25 km/h) head first into a concretewall. Imagine a second person running at15 miles per hour into a wall covered by a3-foot (90 cm) thick deformable cushion.In the first instance the person could be se-riously injured or even killed. In the second,the runner could expect to walk away un-injured. Why? In the first instance, the bodyhit the non-yielding concrete surface andstopped immediately. All of the energy thesprinter built up was absorbed by the struc-tures of the body, not by the non-yielding
concrete surface. In the second example, thebody had exactly the same amount of en-ergy that had to be absorbed as in the firstexample, but it continued to move into thepadding, giving the body additional timeand distance to slow down to a completestop as the padding absorbed the sprinter’senergy by deforming.
If a car crashes into a concrete wall at30 miles per hour (50 km/h), the frontbumper of the car stops immediately, butthe passenger compartment stops moregradually as the front structure of the ve-hicle crumples. The belted occupant is heldto the seat and gains the advantage of thecushion provided by the crumpling of thefront of the vehicle and the stretching of thesafety belt webbing. That belted occupant’sbody slows down from 50 km/h (30 mph)to zero over a distance of 90-120 cm (3-4 feet). That belted occupant also remainsproperly positioned so that, if the air bagdeploys in a frontal collision, the occupantmight never strike any rigid structures inthe vehicle. The unbelted occupant receivesno such benefit. The unbelted person is notattached to the vehicle and so that personcontinues to travel at the vehicle’s pre-crashspeed of 30 miles per hour (50 km/h) until
striking a hard object at approximately30 miles per hour (50 km/h) and stoppingabruptly. Even in a frontal collision in whichthe air bag deploys, the unbelted front seatoccupant remains at greater risk of seriousinjury or death than the properly restrainedfront seat occupant. (See “SUPPLEMEN-TAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM” in the index)
1–4 SEATS AND OCCUPANT PROTECTION SYSTEMS
WARNING
SAFETY BELTS PROTECT
Accident statistics show that drivers andpassengers properly wearing safety beltshave a lower risk of being injured anda higher chance of surviving an accident.For this reason, wearing a safety belt islegally required in most countries.
WEARING THE SAFETY BELT
Each front seat and each outboard rearseat of your vehicle is equipped with athree-point safety belt system that isanchored at three locations. Both frontseats and outboard rear seats’ belts arestored and locked by a retractor mecha-nism. When set in its normal emergencylocking mode, the three-point safety beltrequires no length adjustment and al-lows freedom of movement when thevehicle moves at constant speeds.
(Continued)
WARNING
However in a sudden or strong stop, orduring heavy acceleration or decelera-tion, the safety belt will lock automati-cally to restrain the body.
In order to gain the full benefit of asafety belt, you must wear it correctlyand position yourself correctly withinyour seat, as follows:
• Seatback upright (not reclined, tokeep you from “submarining” or slip-ping out from under the safety belt,and injuring vulnerable body parts ina crash.)
• Occupant sitting upright (notslouched, to properly position the lapand shoulder portions of the safetybelt for maximum restraint and mini-mum injury to soft and vulnerableparts of your body in a crash)
• Safety belt latch plate and buckle se-curely fastened with a “click” (if thesafety belt is not securely latched, itcannot provide any protection; pull onthe belt to make sure it is secure)
(Continued)
WARNING
• Lap portion of safety belt snug andlow on hips and pelvis (not abdomenwhere the restraining belt could causeserious injury in a crash – THIS ISPARTICULARLY IMPORTANTFOR PREGNANT WOMEN)
• Shoulder portion of the safety beltsover your outside shoulder and snugagainst the chest (not under an arm,around your neck, over an insideshoulder or behind your back, andnot loose with slack allowing exces-sive forward movement and injury ina crash)
• Knees straight forward ( so thedriver’s side front knee bolsters canhelp prevent you from “submarin-ing” under the belt in a crash)
(Continued)
SEATS AND OCCUPANT PROTECTION SYSTEMS 1–5
WARNING
• Only one occupant per one safety belt(do not allow more than one personin a safety belt; multiple people in asingle safety belt can exceed the ca-pacity of the safety belts and peoplesharing a safety belt can cause crush-ing and other injuries to each otherin a crash)
• Children in secure child seats (in acrash the forces are too great for anadult to hold onto a child and theadult will crush the child if they sharethe same safety belt)
• No unbelted occupants (occupantsnot wearing a safety belt are an in-jury threat to themselves and to otheroccupants in the vehicle because in acrash they become a free-flying bodythat will strike other persons in theirpath)
(Continued)
WARNING
• No twisted safety belts (twisted safetybelts will not move freely and restrainproperly and can cut into the occu-pants rather than spread the force,thus increasing the risk of injury anddeath)
• Lock doors (unlocked doors increasethe risk of injury and death fromexternal impacts and ejection in acrash)
• Make periodic checks (while riding inthe vehicle, check from time to timeto be sure that the lap portion of thebelt is snugly across the hips and hasnot ridden up around the waist andthat the shoulder portion is midwayover the shoulder and across thechest; properly positioned belts allowthe stronger structures of the hipsand shoulders to absorb the forcesof the belt against the body, while im-properly positioned belts may causeneck injury or injury to the vulner-able organs in the abdominal area).
(Continued)
WARNING
• No hard or breakable objects, be-tween safety belts and body parts(objects such as ballpoint pens,glasses, etc. in the occupant’s pocketor on their clothes can cause injuryin the event of a collision)
WARNING
If the safety belt goes over an armrest(if so equipped), lap portion of thesafety belt could force the occupant’s ab-domen, not the pelvis, in a collision.
• Be sure that the safety belt goes un-der the armrests.
Failure to follow this can result in inju-ries or even death in case of a collision.
1–6 SEATS AND OCCUPANT PROTECTION SYSTEMS
REAR SEAT OCCUPANTSThe rear seat is equipped with two out-board seating positions and a centre seat-ing position featuring three-point lap-and-shoulder safety belts.
Each outboard seating positions areequipped with child restraint lower an-chors. (See “LOWER CHILD RESTRAINTANCHORS” in the index for more infor-mation)
SAFETY BELT WARNING CHIMEThe safety belt warning chime will soundfor about 6 seconds when the ignitionswitch is ON unless the driver’s safety beltis securely fastened. If you hear this warn-ing chime, make sure the driver’s safety beltis securely fastened before operating thevehicle.
THREE-POINT SAFETY BELTSTo help reduce the risk of personal injuryin collisions or sudden manoeuvre, yourvehicle is equipped with three-point safetybelts. The two front seats, the two out-board rear seating positions and a centrerear seating position are each equipped withthree-point safety belts. These safety beltsare each anchored in three locations to re-strain passengers who are properly posi-tioned and wearing the safety belt.
A three-point safety belt set in the ELR(Emergency Locking Retractor) mode re-quires no length adjustment and allows thefreedom of body movement when the ve-hicle moves at a constant speed.
However, in the event of a sudden or strongstop, or during heavy acceleration or de-celeration, the safety belt will lock automati-cally to restrain the body.
FRONT SEAT OCCUPANTSEach front seat is equipped with adjustableseat and seatback with height-adjustablehead restraint, three point lap-and-shoul-der safety belts, and a supplemental re-straint system (air bag).
SEATS AND OCCUPANT PROTECTION SYSTEMS 1–7
S3W1061A S3W1062A
Always fasten your safety belts correctly:
1. Close and lock the doors.
2. Make sure seatback is upright.
3. Pick up the safety belt latch plate and useit to pull the belt across your body. Makesure the belt is not twisted. If the safetybelt locks as you are pulling it out, al-low it to rewind into the retractor. Pullthe safety belt out again to a comfort-able and secure length.
4. Position the shoulder belt midway overthe shoulder and across the chest. Neverplace the shoulder belt across the neck.
This assures that in the case of a colli-sion, the belt applies force to the shoul-der bones and keeps the impact awayfrom ribs or neck, helping to avoid seri-ous internal injuries.
5. Wear the lap belt low and snug on thehips, not the waist. This assures that inthe case of a collision, the belt appliesforce to the pelvic bones and not the ab-domen, helping to avoid serious injuries.
6. Push the latch plate firmly into the buckleuntil the mechanism clicks. Make sureyou are using the correct buckle. Be sureto position the release button on thebuckle so you can unbuckle the safetybelt quickly if necessary.
7. Pull up on the latch plate to make sureit is secure.
To remove the safety belt, press the releasebutton on the buckle. The belt will retractautomatically. Guide the safety belt as itretracts to prevent the latch plate fromdamaging interior surfaces or injuring oc-cupants.
1–8 SEATS AND OCCUPANT PROTECTION SYSTEMS
REAR CENTRE SAFETY BELT(SALOON ONLY)
The rear centre safety belt system includesa retractable safety belt, a buckle with blackrelease button, and a buckle with red re-lease button marked as “CENTRE”. Therear centre safety belt buckles are designedso as not to allow a wrong latch plate tobe inserted.
When the rear seatback is in upright posi-tion, keep latching the latch plate into thebuckle with black button. Only when therear seatback will be folded down, unlatchthe latch plate.
Before fastening the rear centre belt, pushthe latch plate (1) at the end of the safetybelt strap into the buckle with black but-ton and make sure the webbing is nottwisted. To fasten the belt, sit up straightand well back in the seat, pull the latch plate(A) across your body and press it into thebuckle (B) until you hear a “click”.
To unfasten the belt, push the red buttonon the buckle (B) and allow the belt to re-tract.
Maintain your safety belts:
1. Periodically inspect all safety belts, relatedparts, and assemblies. Have these replacedby a workshop if any safety belts or as-semblies or related parts are damaged. Werecommend your authorised Chevroletrepairer.
2. You must replace any safety belt or re-lated part that has been stretched ordamaged in an accident, even if thestretching or damage is not obvious orvisible. Stretched belts and damagedparts do not perform effectively. Re-placement of safety belts must be new.
3. We recommend replacing the entiresafety belt assembly after your vehiclehas been in a collision. If a trained spe-cialist finds that no safety belt damagehas occurred and that everything is incorrect working order, you need notmake any replacement. We recommendthat you consult your authorisedChevrolet repairer.
4. It is dangerous to operate your vehiclewith damaged safety belts or other parts.
SEATS AND OCCUPANT PROTECTION SYSTEMS 1–9
N4W1063A L3W1081A
WARNING
To minimise risk of severe injury ordeath in the event of a crash, alwayswear safety belt with both latchesbuckled.
When rear seatback is folded down, pushthe black button on the buckle (1) and al-low the belt to retract. After returning a rearseatback to the normal position, push thelatch plate (1) at the end of the safety beltstrap into the buckle with black button andmake sure the webbing is not twisted.
SAFETY BELT PRETENSIONERYour vehicle is equipped with a safety beltpretensioner system at the front seatingpositions. You can use the pretensionersafety belts in the same manner as ordinarysafety belts.
The safety belt pretensioner system is acti-vated based on crash severity. The crashsensors and the electronic controller of theair bag system also control the safety beltpretensioners.
The pretensioner is located in each frontsafety belt retractor. The pretensioner tight-ens the safety belt so the belt fits theoccupant’s body more snugly in the eventof a frontal crash. The retractors will re-
main locked after the pretensioners are ac-tivated. Upon activation, some noise willoccur and some smoke may be released.These conditions are not harmful and donot indicate a fire in the vehicle.
The driver and all passengers must be prop-erly restrained by wearing safety belts at alltimes, whether or not a pretensioner isequipped at their seating position, to mini-mize the risk of severe injury or death inthe event of a crash. Sit fully back in theseat; sit up straight; do not lean forwardor sideways. Adjust the belt so the lap por-tion of the belt is worn low across the pel-vis, not across the waist.
Please note that the pretensioners will acti-vate only in severe frontal collisions. Theyare not designed to activate in rear impacts,side impacts, rollovers or minor frontalcollisions. The pretensioners can be acti-vated only once. If the pretensioners areactivated, have the pretensioner system ser-viced by a workshop as soon as possible.We recommend your authorised Chevroletrepairer.
1–10 SEATS AND OCCUPANT PROTECTION SYSTEMS
WARNING
Never drive with an improperly posi-tioned safety belt. To help avoid inju-ries, always observe the following pre-cautions:
• Adjust the safety belt height beforedriving.
• Wear the shoulder belt midwayacross the shoulder.
• Lock the safety belt anchor in posi-tion.
Failure to follow these precautions canresult in injuries or even death in caseof a collision.
WARNING
Incorrect adjustment of the safety beltheight could reduce the effectiveness ofthe safety belt in a crash.
SAFETY BELT HEIGHTADJUSTMENTTo operate safety belts with a height-adjust-able upper anchorage point, do the follow-ing:
1. Pull on the safety belt.
2. Press the safety belt height adjuster in thearea indicated by the arrow in the illus-tration.
3. Adjust the safety belt height before youbegin driving, so that the shoulder beltlies midway across the shoulder closestto your door.
S3W1071A
If the air bag warning lamp on the instrumentcluster does not blink or come on brieflywhen the ignition switch is turned to the“ON” position, stays on for more than 10seconds, or comes on while driving, thepretensioner system or the air bag system maynot work correctly. Have both systems in-spected by a workshop as soon as possible.We recommend your authorised Chevroletrepairer.
Service on or around the pretensioner sys-tem components or wiring must be per-formed only by a specially trained work-shop. We recommend your authorisedChevrolet repairer. Improper service couldresult in unintended activation ofpretensioners or could render thepretensioner inoperative. Either of these twoconditions may result in personal injury.
SEATS AND OCCUPANT PROTECTION SYSTEMS 1–11
PREGNANT WOMEN ANDSAFETY BELTSSafety belts work for everyone, includingpregnant women.
Like all occupants, pregnant women aremore likely to be seriously injured if theydo not wear safety belts. In addition, whena safety belt is worn properly, it is morelikely that the unborn child will be safe in acrash.
To provide maximum protection, a preg-nant woman should wear a three-pointsafety belt. She should wear the lap portionof the belt as low as possible throughouther pregnancy.
WARNING
Child safety restraints are available in awide range of sizes and configurations.Due to the shape and dimensions ofyour vehicle’s interior and seats, not allchild safety restraints will fit in yourvehicle.
It is your responsibility to ensure thatthe child safety restraint you are install-ing fits properly and can be adequatelyattached to the vehicle with the safetybelts and the child safety restraint an-chors.
A child safety restraint that is not thecorrect size for the vehicle or the child,or a child safety restraint that is improp-erly attached to your vehicle can lead toserious personal injury to the child andother passengers in the vehicle in theevent of a collision.
CHILD RESTRAINTOnce you have selected an appropriate in-fant or child restraint, read and carefullyfollow the manufacturer’s instructions forinstalling and using the system. The childrestraint system should be appropriate foryour child’s age, height and weight; and itshould fit properly and securely in the ve-hicle. There are different kinds of restraintsystems that are available for all sizes ofchildren until they reach a height and weightat which they can safely use the vehicle’ssafety belt system.
WARNING
Your vehicle is designed to fit universalchild restraint seat only to the each rearoutboard seating positions.
• Do not install universal child restraintseat to the front passenger’s seat and/or rear centre seating position.
Accident statistics show that children aresafer in accidents when they are restrainedin the rear seat rather than the front seatof the vehicle.
1–12 SEATS AND OCCUPANT PROTECTION SYSTEMS
WARNING
(Continued)• Extreme Hazard! Do not use a rear-
ward facing child restraint on a seatprotected by an air bag in front of it!Always secure a rear-facing child re-straint in the rear seat.
S3W1101A
Children who have outgrown their childrestraint system should sit in the rear seat,restrained by the safety belt that is fastenedproperly, making sure that the shoulderportion is adjusted to be as far away fromthe neck as possible and that the lap por-tion is low across the hips. Check the beltposition from time to time to verify that itis safely positioned.
If the child must sit in a front seat, makecertain that the shoulder belt does not lieacross the child’s face or neck. If it does,move the child closer to the centre of thevehicle so that the safety belt is on the child’sshoulder.
Never let the child stand or kneel on theseat, or in the cargo areas, while your ve-hicle is moving.
When the child seat is not in use, secure theseat with the vehicle’s safety belt or removeit from the vehicle.
WARNING
• Never hold a baby in your arms whileriding in a vehicle. Be sure to secureinfants and small children in re-straints approved for their use.
• During a crash, a baby will becomeso heavy you can’t hold it. For ex-ample, in a crash at only 25 mph(40 km/h), a 12-lb (5.5 kg) baby willbecome a 240-lb (110 kg) forceagainst your arms.
• Failing to secure infants and smallchildren in restraints approved fortheir use can result in injury during acollision, or even death.
• According to accident statistics, chil-dren are safer when properly re-strained in the rear seats than in afront seat.
• Do not install any child restraint inthe front passenger’s seat if your ve-hicle is equipped with side air bag.See “SIDE AIR BAGS” in the indexfor more information.
(Continued)
SEATS AND OCCUPANT PROTECTION SYSTEMS 1–13
LOWER CHILD RESTRAINTANCHORSIn the past, child restraints have been at-tached to a vehicle’s seat by safety belts. Asa result, child restraints were often installedincorrectly or too loosely to adequatelyprotect your child. We now equip yourvehicle with Lower Child Restraint Anchorsat the two rear outboard seating positions,allowing child restraints to be attached di-rectly to the body of the vehicle.
To install a child restraint which comesequipped with lower anchor attachments,follow the instructions supplied with yourchild restraint and the “Installation of ChildRestraints with Lower Anchor Attach-ments” procedure on the following pagesof this manual.
Please take the time to carefully read andfollow all of the instructions on the follow-ing pages and the instructions supplied withyour child restraint.
Your child’s safety depends on it!
If you have questions, or any doubtswhether you have installed your child re-straint properly, contact the child restraintmanufacturer. If you are still having troubleinstalling the child restraint in your vehicle,please consult a workshop. We recommendyour authorised Chevrolet repairer.
N4W1101ALower anchors
WARNING
Use all child restraint anchors for theirdesigned purpose only.
Child restraint lower anchors are de-signed only to hold child restraintswhich come equipped with lower anchorattachments.
• Do not use child restraint lower an-chors to hold adult safety belts, har-nesses, or other items of equipmentin your vehicle.
Using child restraint anchors to holdadult safety belts, harnesses, or otheritems or equipment in your vehicle willnot provide adequate protection in thecase of a collision and could result ininjuries or even death.
J221_01_EN-R.pmd 2007-02-15, 13:5413
1–14 SEATS AND OCCUPANT PROTECTION SYSTEMS
5. Adjust and tighten the child restraintaccording to the instructions suppliedwith the child restraint.
6. Push and pull on the child restraint af-ter installation to be sure the child re-straint is secure.
N4W1112A
Installation of child restraints with loweranchor attachments
To install a child restraint designed for at-tachment to lower anchors:
1. Select one of the rear outboard seatingpositions for installation of the child re-straint.
2. Locate the two Lower Child RestraintAnchor positions. The location of eachlower anchor is identified with a circu-lar marking on the lower edge of therear seatback.
3. Make sure there are no foreign objectsaround the Lower Child Restraint An-chors, including safety belt buckles orsafety belts. Foreign objects can interferewith the proper latching of the child re-straint to the anchors.
4. Place the child restraint on the seat overthe two Lower Child Restraint Anchorsand attach it to the anchors followingthe instructions supplied with the childrestraint.
N4W1111AProper installation positions
N4W1113A
SEATS AND OCCUPANT PROTECTION SYSTEMS 1–15
HEAD RESTRAINTSHead restraints are designed to reduce therisk of neck injuries in case of a collision.
For maximum protection, slide the headrestraint up or down so the top of the re-straint is level with the top of your ears.
WARNING
Removed or improperly adjusted headrestraints can result in serious head andneck injuries in case of a collision.
If the head restraint must be removed forany reason,
1. Pull it up to the stop position.
2. While pushing the release button, lift thehead restraint from the guide sleeve.
3. Replace head restraint and reset it inintended position before driving.
WARNING
Make sure that the head restraint hasbeen put back into place and readjustedbefore driving.
To adjust the front and rear head re-straints, raise the head restraint or push itdown while pressing the release button.
N4W1121A
To tilt the front head restraints*,
1. Place it in its upright position by push-ing it forward fully and releasing it.
2. Push the head restraint forward care-fully until it is adjusted to the desiredposition.
N4W1122B
1–16 SEATS AND OCCUPANT PROTECTION SYSTEMS
FRONT SEAT RECLINING ADJUSTMENT
To tilt seatback forward or backward, turnthe handwheel on the outside of theseatback until the seatback is adjusted tothe desired position.
WARNING
• Do not adjust the driver’s seatbackwhile the vehicle is moving.
Driver could lose control of the vehicleand injury or property damage couldresult.
N4G1141QN4G1152Q
WARNING
• Do not adjust the driver’s seat whilethe vehicle is moving.
Driver could lose control of the vehicleand injury or property damage couldresult.
FRONT SEATSFRONT SEAT SLIDE ADJUSTMENT
(passenger seat with undertray*)
To move the front seat forward or back-ward:
1. Pull up and hold the lever located un-der the front side of the front seat.
2. Slide the seat to the desired position.
3. Release the lever.
N4G1151Q
SEATS AND OCCUPANT PROTECTION SYSTEMS 1–17
DRIVER’S SEAT HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT
To adjust the position of the driver’s seatcushion, turn the handwheel on the out-side of the seat cushion until the seat cush-ion is adjusted to the desired position.
Turn the front handwheel to adjust theheight of the front portion of the seat cush-ion and turn the rear handwheel to adjustthe height of the rear portion.
WARNING
If a crash occurs, front occupants in re-clined seats can lose restraining benefitsof the seatback and safety belts by slid-ing out from under the safety belt or bybeing thrown into the seat belt in anawkward position.
• Do not position either front seatbackin the reclined position while the ve-hicle is being operated.
Serious injuries, death and ejection fromthe vehicle can result.
N4G1171Q
FRONT SEAT LUMBAR SUPPORT*
To adjust the front seat lumbar support,pull the lever on the outside of the seatbackup or down until the desired support isachieved.
Push the lever down to adjust the supportfor the lower part of the seatback.
Pull the lever up to return the support toits original position.
N4G1181Q
1–18 SEATS AND OCCUPANT PROTECTION SYSTEMS
WARNING
• Ensure that the rear seatbacks are allthe way back and locked in positionbefore operating the vehicle with pas-sengers in the back seat.
• Do not press the release buttons onthe top of the seatback while the ve-hicle is moving.
Pressing the release buttons while the ve-hicle is moving can cause injuries ordamage to the occupants.
3. Pull the seatback forward again to makesure the seatback is properly latched.
N5D1002A
WARNING
• Do not stack luggage or other cargohigher than the front seats.
• Do not allow passengers to sit on thefolded seatbacks while the vehicle isin motion.
• Your vehicle has separate areas de-signed specifically for carrying cargoor passengers.
• Unrestrained luggage or passengerson a folded seatback can be thrownabout within or ejected from the ve-hicle in a sudden stop or accident.
Serious injuries or death can result.
REAR SEATSFOLDING REAR SEATBACK To fold down the rear seatbacks separately:
1. Pull up on the release button on top ofthe rear seatback.
2. Fold the rear seatback forward anddown.
To return a rear seatback to its originalposition:
1. Lift the rear seatback and push to origi-nal position. Make sure the safety beltsare not pinched by the latch.
2. Latch the seatback into place by push-ing on the top of the seatback.
SEATS AND OCCUPANT PROTECTION SYSTEMS 1–19
N4G1201P
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINTSYSTEM (AIR BAG)Your vehicle is equipped with an air bagsupplemental restraint system (SRS) de-signed to protect properly seated and re-strained front seat occupants. Both thedriver and front passenger seating posi-tions are equipped with driver and passen-ger air bags and side air bags (if soequipped), in addition to three-point safetybelts and other safety features. Each air bagis specially packed in a module, from whichthe air bag is designed to inflate and deployat extremely high speed and force in theevent your vehicle is involved in certain typesof collisions which pose a high risk of seri-ous injury or death to the driver and pas-sengers.
DRIVER’S AND FRONT PASSENGER’S AIRBAG
Driver’s air bag
The driver’s air bag module is located in thecentre of the steering wheel.
Front passenger’s air bag
The passenger’s air bag module is locatedin the instrument panel, above the glovebox.
Driver’s air bagFront passenger’sair bag
WARNING
Air bags are only a supplemental re-straint, and are most effective in combi-nation with safety belts.
All occupants, including the driver,should always wear their safety belts,whether or not an air bag is also pro-vided at their seating position, to mini-mize the risk of severe injury or deathin the event of a crash.
• Frontal air bags do not deploy in sideor rear collisions. Occupants notwearing their safety belts will not beprotected by any restraint system, re-sulting in severe injuries or death inthese types of collisions.
• Occupants who are not properlywearing their safety belts may bethrown forward by braking beforeimpact, placing their bodies near oragainst the air bag modules. This cancause severe injury from the force ofan air bag’s deployment.
1–20 SEATS AND OCCUPANT PROTECTION SYSTEMS
NOTE
An air bag can also inflate in moderateto severe non-collision situations (e.g.,slamming the under body or other solidcomponent of the vehicle in a dip in thedriving surface) where the crash sensorsgenerate a signal equivalent to a crashinto a solid immovable barrier at 15 to23 km/h (9.3 ~ 14.3 mph).
How air bags work
Air bags are designed to keep your head,neck, and chest from slamming into theinstrument panel, steering wheel orwindscreen in a front-end crash. They arenot designed to inflate in rear-end orrollover crashes or in most side-impactcrashes. Your air bags are designed to de-ploy in crashes that are equivalent to, orexceed the force of a vehicle traveling at aspeed of 15 to 23 km/h (9.3 ~ 14.3 mph)crashing into a solid immovable wall.
The air bag system activates druing a se-vere collision which is either frontal or whenthe impact angle is up to 30° from straightahead.
This crash severity level at which the air bagwill deploy was selected to assure inflationof air bags in our vehicles at or below thecrash severity at which a statistical risk ofdeath begins for frontal collisions.
In the real world, cars rarely crash squarelyinto immovable walls; air bags most oftendeploy when a vehicle collides with anothervehicle. The actual speed at which the airbags will inflate may be higher in the realworld, because real-world accidents usuallyinvolve more complicated multi-vehicle im-pacts, angled impacts, and incomplete fron-tal impacts (e.g. sideswipes), and because theobject struck is usually not immovable.
N4W1182A
SEATS AND OCCUPANT PROTECTION SYSTEMS 1–21
NOTE
Air bags cannot smother you and theydon’t restrict your movement. Air bagshave vents, so they deflate immediatelyafter cushioning you.
The entire process, from initial contactthrough the air bag’s inflation and defla-tion, occurs within 0.2 seconds, faster thanthe blink of an eye. Because the collision isover in a fraction of a second, and vehiclesinvolved in an accident usually come to thefinal point of rest only one or two secondsafter initial contact, the supplemental re-straint system must sense the crash andcause the air bags to deploy nearly instan-taneously to protect the vehicle’s occupants.
Air bags inflate when a sensor detects afront-end crash of a severity sufficient forair bag deployment. The crash sensorsends an electric signal to initiate the air bag’sinflation. A propellant is ignited which rap-idly burns inside the air bag module, pro-ducing enough nitrogen gas to fully inflatethe air bag. The chemical process and ni-trogen gas are harmless to the vehicle’s oc-cupants. Within 0.045 seconds of the crashdetection, the pressure of the inflating airbag splits open the plastic trim covering onthe module, which is scored on the insidesurface to allow the trim of the steeringwheel hub or passenger-side instrumentpanel to split open under force.
The air bag fully inflates to create a surfacethat can catch the forward movement of thefront occupant’s head and upper torso. Asthe occupant comes into contact with theair bag, the gas in the bag empties throughholes at the base of the bag to soak up theforce from the occupant’s forward move-ment.
WARNING
Air bags are only a supplemental re-straint, and are most effective in combi-nation with safety belts.
All occupants, including the driver,should always wear their safety beltswhether or not an air bag is also pro-vided at their seating position, minimisethe risk of severe injury or death in theevent of a crash.
(Continued)
SIDE AIR BAGS*
The side air bag modules are located in theoutboard side of the front seatbacks.
S3W1211P
1–22 SEATS AND OCCUPANT PROTECTION SYSTEMS
WARNING
Children who are seated in close prox-imity to a side air bag may be at risk ofserious or fatal injury if the air bag de-ploys, especially if the child’s head, neck,or chest is close to the air bag at the timeof deployment.
• Never let your child lean on the dooror close to the side air bag module.
• The safest place in the vehicle foryour properly seated and restrainedchild is the back seat.
How the side air bags work
Side air bags are designed to keep yourhead, neck, arm, and shoulder from slam-ming into the front door and window in alateral crash.
The side air bags inflate when a sensordetects a lateral crash of a severity sufficientfor the side air bag deployment.
Your side air bags are designed to deployin lateral collisions that are equivalent to,or exceed the force of a deformable mov-ing barrier travelling at a speed of 15 to25 km/h (9.3 ~ 15.5 mph) crashing into avehicle.
The fact that your vehicle was involved ina crash and the side air bags did not inflatedoes not necessarily mean that there issomething wrong with your side air bags.Side air bags are designed to inflate in a sidecollision, not in front-end, rear-end, orrollover crashes if they don’t produce suf-ficient lateral impact for the deployment ofthe side air bags.
WARNING
(Continued)• Do not place objects on or near the
side air bag modules in the outboardside of each front seats. They canbecome projectiles during inflation,causing severe injury.
• Do not install accessory seat coverson the front seats. The deploymentof the side air bags can be obstructedin a collision leading to serious injury.
• Do not lean your body part or headon the door. The side air bag can hitthe occupants with a considerableforce when it deploys in a collisionleading to serious injury.
• Do not install any child restraint inthe front passenger’s seat if your ve-hicle is equipped with the side air bag.
Failure to follow these precautions canresult in serious injury or even death.
SEATS AND OCCUPANT PROTECTION SYSTEMS 1–23
SRS SERVICING
Your Supplemental Restraint System(SRS)is virtually maintenance free.
However, if any of the following occurs, haveyour SRS serviced immediately by a work-shop. We recommend your authorisedChevrolet repairer.
• Any of your air bags have deployed.
• The air bag warning lamp indicates mal-function. See “AIR BAG WARNINGLAMP” in the index.
NOTE
If your vehicle is equipped with side airbags, the front seat assembly must bereplaced after the side air bag has beendeployed. Consult a workshop for moreinformation. We recommend that youconsult your authorised Chevrolet re-pairer.
AFTER THE AIR BAG DEPLOYS
After the air bag deflates, you may notice aburning smell, smoke, and white powder inthe interior of the vehicle. This is normal.The burning smell is from the propellantthat was ignited to inflate the airbag. Thewhite powder is cornstarch, talcum or so-dium compounds which lubricate the airbag to reduce friction on the air bag dur-ing storage and inflation. Although theymay cause some skin or eye irritation, thesesubstances are not toxic.
WARNING
• Do not drive your vehicle after one ormore air bags have deployed.
• Do not try to repair, alter, or disposeof the air bag yourself.
• Air bags are installed under high pres-sure with sophisticated crash sensingand air bag inflating systems. Allow-ing an untrained and unauthorisedperson to handle an air bag can leadto serious injuries and death.
• Contact a workshop immediately ifeither of your vehicle’s air bag has de-ployed, if damage occurs to your ve-hicle at or near either of the air bagmodules, or if you believe for any rea-son that the operating condition ofeither air bag has been impaired. Werecommend that you consult yourauthorised Chevrolet repairer.
Driving a vehicle after an air bag hasdeployed without authorised service canresult in severe injuries and death.
1–24 SEATS AND OCCUPANT PROTECTION SYSTEMS
In a crash, a vehicle may go from highwayspeed to a full stop in a fraction of a sec-ond and in a distance of less than one foot.This extremely short stopping time and dis-tance greatly increases the force placedupon the occupants. No person has thestrength or reflexes to counteract this force.Even occupants properly positioned andwearing their safety belts will find theirhead, upper torso, arms, and hips thrownforward at the speed the vehicle was travel-ing before impact. In moderate to severefrontal collisions, even occupants wearingsafety belts can sustain internal brain andorgan injuries without the occupant’s heador torso hitting any stationary objects orsurfaces.
Air bags provide additional stopping timeand distance for the head and upper tor-sos of front occupants in moderate to se-vere frontal or near-frontal collisions. Thisadditional time and distance can save livesand prevent serious injuries.
All of these injuries are caused by the forcecreated by the collision as the vehicle isbrought to a sudden stop. The time anddistance which a vehicle is allowed in slow-ing or stopping in great part determines theseverity of a collision’s effect on vehicle oc-cupants. For example, when a vehiclebrakes to a stop at a red light, theoccupant’s bodies are forced forward. Thisis because both the vehicle and its occupantsare initially traveling at the same speed. Thebrakes slow the vehicle, and the occupantscontinue to move forward somewhat insidethe vehicle. However, properly positionedand restrained occupants are rarely injuredwhen a vehicle comes to a stop by evensudden and hard braking. This is becauseeven hard braking allows a comparativelylong time and distance for the vehicle tostop. The safety belts and the occupants’strength are generally sufficient to safelycounteract the force of a braking stop.
HOW AIR BAGS PROTECT FRONTOCCUPANTS
Vehicle occupants are usually injured in acollision because their bodies are throwninto a stationary object, either inside thevehicle, such as the steering wheel, instru-ment panel or windscreen, or outside thevehicle, such as the driving surface or a tree,when the occupant is thrown from the ve-hicle. Severe injuries also occur by occu-pants being jolted by the forces of the crash,even without body contact with a station-ary object or surface.
S3W1241A
SEATS AND OCCUPANT PROTECTION SYSTEMS 1–25
HELP YOUR AIR BAGS TO PROTECTYOU!
Besides their lifesaving benefits, the air bagsystem also poses some moderate risks.
Because an air bag inflates with consider-able force, speed and suddenness, the airbag supplemental restraint system will besafer and more effective if the occupants areproperly positioned in the vehicle.
WARNING
Essential Air Bag Safety Rules:• Never place a rear-facing child seat in
the front seat.• Children age 12 years and under
should ride in the back seat wheneverpossible.
• Always wear your safety belts, evenif your vehicle is equipped with an airbag.
• Move your seatback rearward as faras is comfortable and safe, tilt theseatback slightly and sit against theback of the seat.
• Do not place objects on, over or nearthe air bag modules. They can be-come projectiles during inflation,causing severe injury.
• Do not lean forward or rest any partof your body on the trim covering theair bag modules.
• Do not drive with the steering columntilt adjusted fully upward.
Severe injury and death can result fromfailing to observe these air bag safetyrules.
Always secure any rear-facing child seat inthe back seat.
Child restraint systems in which the childfaces the rear of the seat must never beplaced in the front seat. The deployment ofan air bag risks severe injury or death to achild in a rear-facing child seat placed in thefront seat.
Children belong in the back seat.
According to accident statistics, children age12 years and under are safer when prop-erly restrained in the back seat than in thefront seat, and should ride in the back seatwhenever possible. Children are not saferin the back seat only because of the risksof injury by air bags. Studies have shownthat children are also safer in the back seatthan in a front seat without an air bag.
1–26 SEATS AND OCCUPANT PROTECTION SYSTEMS
• Tilt the safety belt slightly and do notlean forward.
Tilt the seatback slightly, and sit withyour back against the back of the seat.Do not lean or otherwise position yourbody close - within 15 cm(6 inch) - tothe air bag module. Do not rest any partof your body on or near the plastic trimcovering the air bag module (the hub ofthe steering wheel or the passenger sideof the instrument panel above the glovebox). Try to keep your head and bodymore than 25 to 30 cm (10 to 12 inches)away from the air bag. More distance issafer.
Occupants who are not properly wear-ing their safety belts may be thrown for-ward by braking before impact, placingtheir bodies near or against the air bagmodules. This can cause severe injuryfrom the force of air bag’s deployment.
• Move the back of the seat rearward asfar back as is comfortable and safe.
Positioning your seat farther away fromthe air bag module will not decrease theeffectiveness of the air bag. Greater dis-tance from the module means greaterprotection from the air bag’s forcefuland sudden deployment. Never move thedriver’s seatback so far as to impair thedriver’s ability to comfortably reach thesteering wheel, pedals and other instru-ment and controls.
Correct positioning of adults and teenag-ers.
Adults and teenagers seated in the frontdriver and passenger seats can also improvetheir safety and the effectiveness of the airbags by using proper seating positions.
For the best seating position of adults andteenagers:
• Wear the three-point safety belts at alltimes.
All occupants, including the driver,should always wear their safety beltswhether or not an air bag is also pro-vided at their seating position to mini-mize the risk of severe injury or deathin the event of a crash.
Air bags do not deploy in rear and side-impact collisions. Occupants not wear-ing their safety belts will not be pro-tected by any restraint system, resultingin severe injuries or death in these typesof collisions.
SEATS AND OCCUPANT PROTECTION SYSTEMS 1–27
• Do not place objects, children or petsbetween you and the air bag module.
Your vehicle’s air bag modules are lo-cated on the steering wheel and on theinstrument panel above the glove box.Placing objects on, over or near the plas-tic trim covering these air bag modulescould cause those objects to be propelledby the inflating air bag into your faceand torso causing serious injury.
Children and pets should never ride onanother occupant’s lap. Do not placeobjects which could cause injury duringdeployment on an occupant’s lap.
• Tilt the steering wheel downward (if soequipped), pointing the air bag towardyour chest instead of your head andneck.
Never position the steering wheel at thehighest position. This position shouldonly be used to allow easy entry and exitfrom the driver’s seat. Lower the steer-ing before starting to drive. This will aimthe air bag at the driver’s chest, ratherthan the more easily injured head andneck.
WARNING
To perform well, an air bag must de-ploy quickly. The force is greatest in thefirst 5-8 cm (2-3 inches) after the air bagbursts through its cover and begins toinflate. Those 2 to 3 inches immediatelyafter the air bag bursts through its mod-ule cover and begins to inflate are therisk zone.
• If an occupant’s body is in this riskzone when the air bag deploys, severeinjury or even death could result.
• The force decreases as the air bag in-flates farther from the module cover.
• Greater distance from the air bagmodule means greater safety whenthe air bag deploys.
NOTE
The fact that your vehicle may be se-verely damaged and the air bags did notinflate or the fact that the vehicle is rela-tively undamaged and the air bag didinflate does not necessarily mean thatthere is something wrong with your airbag system. The crash sensors detect theseverity of the crash, not the amount ofdamage to the vehicle.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS 2–1
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS2
(Continued)
• QUICK VIEW – INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS(SALOON) ............................................................. 2-3
• QUICK VIEW – INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS(HATCHBACK/WAGON) ....................................... 2-4
• INSTRUMENT CLUSTER ........................................ 2-5
• SPEEDOMETER ..................................................... 2-7
• TACHOMETER ...................................................... 2-7
• FUEL GAUGE ........................................................ 2-8
• TEMPERATURE GAUGE ........................................ 2-8
• INDICATORS AND WARNING LAMPS ................. 2-9
• SWITCHES AND CONTROLS .............................. 2-22
• KEYS .................................................................... 2-31
• KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM .................................... 2-32
• DOOR LOCKS ..................................................... 2-35
• ELECTRIC WINDOWS ......................................... 2-38
• MANUAL WINDOWS ......................................... 2-39
• BOOT LID (SALOON) ......................................... 2-40
• TAILGATE (HATCHBACK/WAGON) .................... 2-41
• BONNET ............................................................. 2-42
• INTERIOR COURTESY LAMPS ............................ 2-43
• ELECTRIC SUNROOF .......................................... 2-44
• DIGITAL CLOCK .................................................. 2-45
• CIGARETTE LIGHTER ANDACCESSORY POWER OUTLET ........................... 2-46
• ASHTRAYS ........................................................... 2-48
• HORN ................................................................. 2-49
• CUP HOLDERS ................................................... 2-49
• GLOVE BOX ........................................................ 2-49
• LOWER DEPOSIT BOX ....................................... 2-51
• COIN STORAGE .................................................. 2-51
• CONSOLE BOX ................................................... 2-51
• SEATBACK SHOPPING HOOK ............................ 2-52
• FRONT PASSENGER SEAT UNDERTRAY ............. 2-52
• SUNGLASS HOLDER ........................................... 2-52
• SUN VISORS ....................................................... 2-53
• ASSIST GRIP WITH COAT HOOK ....................... 2-53
• SECURITY BARRIER NET ..................................... 2-54
• LUGGAGE STORAGE AREA ............................... 2-56
• ROOF RACK ....................................................... 2-58
• ANTENNA ........................................................... 2-58
• SEAT HEATER SWITCH ....................................... 2-59
• CRUISE CONTROL .............................................. 2-59
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS 2–3
QUICK VIEW – INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS (SALOON)
1. Driver’s airbag
2. Front passenger’s airbag
3. Audio system*
4. Centre vent outlet
5. Side vent outlet
6. Instrument panel
7. Climate control*
8. Hazard warning flasher button
9. Glove box
10. Coin storage
11. Bonnet release handle
12. Lower deposit box
13. Digital clock
14. Cigar lighter
15. Ashtray
16. Accelerator pedal
17. Brake pedal
18. Clutch pedal
N7W2001P
2–4 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
QUICK VIEW – INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS (HATCHBACK/WAGON)
1. Driver’s airbag
2. Front passenger’s airbag
3. Audio system*
4. Center vent outlet
5. Side vent outlet
6. Instrument panel
7. Climate control*
8. Hazard warning flasher button
9. Glove box
10. Coin storage
11. Hood release handle
12. Lower deposit box
13. Digital clock
14. Cigar lighter
15. Ashtray
16. Accelerator pedal
17. Brake pedal
18. Clutch pedal
N7W2002P
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS 2–5
INSTRUMENTS CLUSTER (GASOLINE)
1. Tachometer
2. Speedometer
3. Temperature gauge
4. Fuel gauge
5. Turn signal / hazard warning flasher
6. TCS warning lamp*
7. ABS warning lamp
8. SSPS warning lamp*
9. Hold mode indicator*
10. Door open warning lamp
11. Safety belt reminder
12. Charging system warning lamp
13. Brake system warning lamp
14. Odometer
15. Selector lever position indicator*
16. Odometer mode select button
17. Low fuel level warning lamp
18. Malfunction indicator lamp
19. Engine oil pressure warning lamp
20. Airbag warning lamp
21. Front fog lamp indicator*
22. High beam indicator
23. Rear fog lamp indicator
24. Boot lid open warning lamp*
N5W2001P
1
7
12 138 9
10 11
1514
1619 20
6
5 5
4
1817
3
21
22 23
2
24
2–6 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
N7W2001Q
1
7
12 138 9
10 11
1514
1619 20
6
5 5
4
1817
3
21
22 23
2
24
CHANGEOIL SOON
9
25
26
27
28
29
30
INSTRUMENTS CLUSTER (DIESEL)
1. Tachometer
2. Speedometer
3. Temperature gauge
4. Fuel gauge
5. Turn signal / hazard warning flasher
6. TCS warning lamp*
7. ABS warning lamp
8. SSPS warning lamp*
9. Winter mode indicator*
10. Door open warning lamp
11. Safety belt reminder
12. Charging system warning lamp
13. Brake system warning lamp
14. Odometer
15. Selector lever position indicator*
16. Odometer mode select button
17. Low fuel level warning lamp
18. Malfunction indicator lamp
19. Engine oil pressure warning lamp
20. Airbag warning lamp
21. Front fog lamp indicator*
22. High beam indicator
23. Rear fog lamp indicator
24. Boot lid open warning lamp*
25. Change engine oil lamp*26. Glow plug indicator*27. Engine coolant temperature warning
lamp*28. Water in fuel warning lamp*29. DPF indicator*30. Cruise control indicator*
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS 2–7
N4W2051AN4G2031P
WARNING
Excessive engine speed can damage theengine.
• Do not let the engine reach excessiveengine speed, as indicated by thepointer being in the red zone.
This could result in costly repairs.
SPEEDOMETERThe speedometer shows vehicle speed inkilometres per hour (mph).
ODOMETER / TRIP ODOMETER
The odometer shows how far your car hasbeen driven in kilometres.
TACHOMETERThe tachometer indicates engine speed inrevolutions per minute(rpm).
Never operate the engine at such high rpmthat the tachometer needle is in the redzone.
There are two independant trip odometers,which measure the distances your vehiclehas travelled since you last reset this func-tion.
To reset each trip meter to zero, press andhold the mode select button until it resets.
The odometer, trip A and trip B can beswtiched by pressing the mode select but-ton.
N4W2041A
(Gasoline)
2–8 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
N7W2005B N4G2071PN4G2061P
FUEL GAUGEIndicates how much fuel remains in the fueltank.
After adding fuel and restarting the engine,the fuel gauge pointer slowly moves toshow the new fuel level.
Movement of the fuel within the fuel tankcauses the fuel gauge pointer to move whenyou brake, accelerate or turn.
TEMPERATURE GAUGEIndicates engine coolant temperature whenthe ignition switch is ON.
CAUTION
• Do not continue to drive your vehicleif the temperature gauge pointer is inthe red area of the gauge. This meansyour vehicle’s engine is overheating.
Driving with an overheated engine candamage your vehicle. See “OVER HEAT-ING” in the index.
(Diesel)
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS 2–9
S3W2091A
INDICATORS AND WARNINGLAMPSLOW FUEL LEVEL WARNING LAMP
This light also comes on when the fuel tankis low on fuel.
CAUTION
• Do not let your vehicle run out of fuel.This can damage the catalytic converter.
WARNING
• Do not drive with the ABS warninglamp on.
• The ABS warning lamp may meanyour brakes are not working prop-erly.
Failure to keep your vehicle’s brakes inproper working condition can cause acollision resulting in personal injuriesand damage to your vehicle or otherproperty.
ABS WARNING LAMP
The ABS warning lamp comes on briefly asyou turn the ignition ON. This means thatthe system performs self-checking and theindicator bulb is operating properly. Thelamp should go out after about 3 seconds.Contact a workshop for repairs if the ABSwarning lamp does either of the following:• Does not come on when the ignition is
turned ON.• Does not go out.• Comes on while drivingWe recommend that you consult yourauthorised Chevrolet repairer.
If the ABS warning lamp comes on whiledriving, your vehicle may have an ABSmalfunction. Although your vehicle’s brakesystem will operate normally without ABS,have a workshop check the system andmake any necessary repairs as soon aspossible. We recommend that you consultyour authorised Chevrolet repairer.
See “ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM” inthe index.
S3W2101A
Fill up the fuel tank as soon as possiblewhen warning lamp comes on.
See “FUEL” in the index.
CAUTION
• Do not let your vehicle run out of fuel.This can damage the catalytic converter.
2–10 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
S5W2004A
BRAKE SYSTEM WARNING LAMP
The brake system warning lamp illuminateswhen you turn the ignition ON, before theengine is started.
This means that the indicator is operatingproperly. The lamp should go out after youstart the engine.
The brake system warning lamp also illu-minates when the handbrake is engaged.The lamp goes out when the handbrake isreleased. Make sure you release thehandbrake fully before you drive your ve-hicle.
WARNING
The air bag warning lamp stays on whenthe air bag system has a problem
• Do not drive your vehicle if the airbag warning lamp is on. Have thesystem checked at a workshop assoon as possible. We recommendyour authorised Chevrolet repairer.
Driving without a properly functioningair bag system may lead to personalinjury, or even death, in the event of anaccident.
An air bag system malfunction can be in-dicated by any of these warning lamp dis-plays:
• Does not flash when the ignition isswitched on.
• Stays on after several flashes.
• Flashes while driving.
• Stays on continuously while driving.
For a description of the air bag system andother occupant protection systems, see sec-tion 1.
AIR BAG WARNING LAMP
The air bag warning lamp flashes severaltimes when you turn the ignition ON. Thismeans the indicator bulb is operating prop-erly and that your air bag system is func-tional.
S3W2111A
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS 2–11
CAUTION
• Do not drive with the brake systemwarning lamp on.
• This may mean your brakes are notworking properly.
• Driving with malfunctioning brakescan lead to a collision resulting inpersonal injuries and damage to yourvehicle and other property.
If the brake system warning lamp comes oneven when the handbrake is completely re-leased, it may mean the brake fluid level inthe reservoir is low.
If so, follow these steps:
1. Carefully pull off the road and come toa stop.
2. Check the brake fluid level.
3. Add the recommended brake fluid up tothe MAX mark. See “ADDING BRAKE/CLUTCH FLUID” in the index.
CAUTION
• Do not drive your vehicle if the brakesystem warning lamp does not come onwhen the handbrake is engaged and theignition is ON.
• Make sure the bulb is working prop-erly. If the lamp does not come on whenthe handbrake is engaged and the igni-tion is ON, even though the warningbulb operates properly, take your ve-hicle to a workshop for a check of thebraking system. We recommend yourauthorised Chevrolet repairer.
These conditions mean your vehiclemay have a fault in the braking system.
Failure to keep your vehicle’s brakes inproper working condition can cause acollision resulting in personal injuriesand damage to your vehicle or otherproperty.
4. Drive carefully at a safe speed to a work-shop to have the brakes inspected if thefollowing conditions exist:
• Your brakes operate normally.
• You judge your vehicle’s brake sys-tem to be safe.
We recommend that you consult yourauthorised Chevrolet repairer.
5. Have your vehicle towed to a workshopfor inspection and repair if the follow-ing conditions exist:
• You find leaks in the brake system.
• The brake system warning lampstays on.
• Your brakes do not operate properly.
We recommend that you consult yourauthorised Chevrolet repairer.
2–12 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
If the charging system warning lamp comeson while you are driving:
1. Pull safely off the road.
2. Stop your vehicle.
3. Make sure the drive belt is not loose orbroken. See “DRIVE BELT” in the in-dex.
ENGINE OIL PRESSURE WARNING LAMP
Illuminates briefly when the ignition isswitched on before the engine starts. Thismeans that the indicator bulb is operatingproperly.
The lamp should go out after the enginestarts.
If the engine oil pressure warning lampcomes on while driving, your engine oilpressure may be dangerously low. Stop theengine immediately and check the oil level.
See “CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL”in the index for a proper checking proce-dure.
S3W2141A
4. If the drive belt is in proper working or-der but the charging system warninglamp stays on, there may be a problemsomewhere in the charging system.Take your vehicle to a workshop for re-pairs as soon as possible. We recommendyour authorised Chevrolet repairer.
CAUTION
A loose or broken drive belt can causethe engine to overheat.
• Do not drive your vehicle if the drivebelt is loose or broken.
An overheated engine can damage yourvehicle and result in costly repairs.
CAUTION
The charging system warning lamp in-dicates there may be a problem withyour charging system.• Do not drive your vehicle when the
charging system warning lamp is on.Driving your vehicle while its chargingsystem is malfunctioning can causedamage to the vehicle.
CHARGING SYSTEM WARNING LAMP
Indicates the battery is being discharged.The lamp should come on when you turnthe ignition ON. The lamp should go outwhen you start the engine.
S3W2131A
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS 2–13
CAUTION
Your engine oil pressure may be dan-gerously low.
• Do not drive with the engine oil pres-sure warning lamp on.
Driving your vehicle with low oil pres-sure can result in costly damage to yourvehicle.
If the oil level is low, add the specified en-gine oil to the correct level. See “CHANG-ING ENGINE OIL AND FILTER” in theindex.
If the oil level is normal, have a workshopcheck your vehicle’s lubricating system. Werecommend your authorised Chevrolet re-pairer.
S5W2003A
CAUTION
• Do not drive with the malfunctionindicator lamp on.
The indicator lamp signals that your ve-hicle has a problem that requires atten-tion. Driving with the malfunction indi-cator lamp on can damage the emissionscontrol system and can affect the fueleconomy and driveability of your ve-hicle.
Consult a workshop to repair the prob-lem as soon as possible. We recommendyour authorised Chevrolet repairer.
MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP
Illuminates briefly as you turn the ignitionON, before you start the engine.
This means that the indicator bulb is oper-ating properly.
The lamp should go out after the engine isstarted.
2–14 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
N5D2006A
DOOR OPEN WARNING LAMP
Illuminates when a door is open or not se-curely latched.
The Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)will illuminate if a fault exists in the emis-sion related components or related sub sys-tems.
It will stay on as long as the ElectronicControl Module (ECM) detects the fault.If a severe misfire level is detected, the MILwill blink continuously. Severe misfire cancause catalytic converter damage.
The Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)will also illuminate to indicate that there isa malfunction in the Diesel Particulate Fil-ter (DPF). If this happens, you should con-sult a workshop to repair the problemimmediately. We recommend yourauthorised Chevrolet repairer. See "DIESELPARTICULATE FILTER (DPF)" in the in-dex for more information.
Your vehicle’s electronic system will switchto an emergency running programme soyou may continue to drive. However, youshould consult a workshop to repair theproblem as soon as possible. We recom-mend your authorised Chevrolet repairer.
If the MIL comes on briefly and then goesout again, this is normal and does not in-dicate a system fault.
If your vehicle is equipped with an auto-matic transaxle, See “AUTOMATICTRANSAXLE EMERGENCY SHIFTINGPROCEDURE” in the index.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS 2–15
HOLD MODE INDICATOR(Gasoline Only)*
Illuminates when the hold mode switch ispressed.
HOLD mode allows the automatictransaxle to be kept in a single gear untilmanually shifted.
To cancel HOLD mode, push the switchagain.
See “HOLD MODE” in the index.
If the hold mode indicator flashes, haveyour vehicle checked and repaired by aworkshop immediately. We recommendyour authorised Chevrolet repairer.
HOLDS3W2171A
SELECTOR LEVER POSITION INDICATOR(AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE)*
Shows the position of the transaxle gearselector lever.
N4W2171AL7D2046A
WINTER MODE INDICATOR(Diesel Only)*
Illuminates when the winter mode switch ispressed.
Use this mode to drive off smoothly undericy and slippery road.
To cancel winter mode, push the switchagain.
See “WINTER MODE” in the index.
2–16 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
L5W2005AL5W2004A
TRACTION CONTROL SYSTEM (TCS)WARNING LAMP*
Illuminates when the ignition is ON andgoes out after about 3 seconds along withthe ABS warning lamp.
The TCS warning lamp blinks when trac-tion control is working.
If the TCS warning lamp comes on whiledriving, have it serviced by a workshop. Werecommend your authorised Chevrolet re-pairer.
See “TRACTION CONTROL SYSTEM”in the index for more information.
NOTE
If your brakes are overheated, TCS willnot work to protect your brake systemand TCS warning lamp will illuminateuntil your brake are cooled down.
SSPS WARNING LAMP*
The speed sensitive power steering (SSPS)warning lamp comes on as you turn theignition ON. The lamp should go out afterabout 3 seconds.Contact a workshop for repairs if the SSPSwarning lamp does either of the following:• Does not come on when the ignition is
turned ON.• Does not go out.• Comes on while driving.We recommend your authorised Chevroletrepairer.See “SPEED SENSITIVE POWER STEER-ING” in the index.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS 2–17
REAR FOG LAMP INDICATOR
Illuminates when the rear fog lamps are on.
See “REAR FOG LAMP” in the index.
SAFETY BELT REMINDER
You must fasten the driver’s safety belt se-curely whenever the ignition switch isturned ON, or the following will occur:
• Safety belt reminder warning lamp illu-minates.
• Safety belt reminder warning chime willsound for about 6 seconds.
S3W2191A S3W2201A
FRONT FOG LAMP INDICATOR*
Illuminates when the front fog lamps areon.
See “FRONT FOG LAMP” in the index.
S3W2181A
2–18 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
S3W2221A
HIGH BEAM INDICATOR
The high beam indicator illuminates whenthe high beam is on and during headlampflash.
CAUTION
These indicators are required for safedriving.
• Immediately replace any burnt outbulbs in your turn signal or hazardwarning flasher indicators.
Failure to keep these indicators in properworking condition can lead to accidentsthat can result in personal injuries ordamage to your vehicle or other prop-erty.
NOTE
Shorter flashes than usual mean yoursignal lamp bulb is burnt out and needsto be replaced.
TURN SIGNAL / HAZARD WARNINGFLASHER INDICATORS
Turn signal / hazard warning flasher indi-cators verify that the exterior turn signalsor hazard warning flashers are workingproperly.
If the green arrows don’t flash when yousignal a turn or push the hazard warningbutton, check the fuse and the bulbs andreplace any that are not operating properly.
S3W2211A
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS 2–19
CRUISE CONTROL INDICATOR(Diesel only)*
Illuminates when cruise control is on. It willgo out when cruise control is turned off.
See “CRUISE CONTROL” in the index.
L5W2006A K5W2022A
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATUREWARNING LAMP(Diesel only)*
Illuminates when the ignition is ON andgoes out after a few seconds.
This lamp tells you that the engine coolanthas overheated.
If you have been operating your vehicleunder normal driving conditions, youshould pull off the road, stop your vehicleand let the engine idle for a few minutes.
If the lamp does not go out, you shouldswitch the engine off and consult a work-shop as soon as possible. We recommendyour authorised Chevrolet repairer.
See “OVERHEATING” in the index.
L7W2001D
CHANGE ENGINE OIL LAMP(Diesel only)*
Your vehicle may have an engine oil lifesystem that lets you know when to changethe engine oil.
When the change engine oil lamp comes on,it means that the engine oil needs to bechanged.
Once the engine oil has been changed, theengine oil life system must be reset. Afterreset, the change engine oil lamp will go out.
2–20 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
See “ENGINE OIL LIFE SYSTEM” in theindex for more information on how to re-set the system.
CAUTION
When the change engine oil lamp comeson in the diesel powered vehicle, the en-gine power can be decreased to informyou that the engine oil needs to bechanged.
Change the engine oil immediately if thechange engine oil lamp illuminates in thediesel-engined vehicle.
C7E2103A
GLOW PLUG INDICATOR* (Diesel only)
Illuminates when the ignition is ON andstays on for a short time or may go off rightaway. The waiting time will vary accordingto the engine coolant temperature.
When the glow plugs are sufficiently heatedfor cold starting, the light will go out. Then,the engine should be started.
See "STARTING THE DIESEL ENGINE"in the index for more information.
CAUTION
When the glow plug indicator comes onwhile driving or the engine cannot bestarted properly, you should consult aworkshop to repair the problem as soonas possible. We recommend yourauthorised Chevrolet repairer.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS 2–21
DIESEL PARTICULATE FILTER (DPF)INDICATOR* (Diesel only)
This indicator comes on when the sootparticles accumulated in the DPF reach acertain amount.
The soot particles should be burnt offthrough a process called regeneration toprevent the filter clogging. As soon as theroad and traffic situation permits when thisindicator comes on, increase speed to morethan 50 km/h for about 15 mimutes. Theindicator goes off as soon as the soot par-ticle is below a certain amount.
See "DIESEL PARTICULATE FILTER(DPF)" in the index for more information.
C7E2102A
WATER IN FUEL WARNING LAMP*(Diesel only)
When the water level in the fuel filter ex-ceeds a certain level, this warning lampcomes on. If this condition occurs, imme-diately drain the water from fuel filter.
For the drain procedures, see “DIESELFUEL FILTER” in the index.
The warning lamp will go off when thedraining is completed.
Before starting the engine after draining,priming operation must be performed. See"How to drain the water from the fuel fil-ter" in the index for more information.
C7E2101A
CAUTION
• The fuel system in the engine may getserious damage if you keep drivingwhile the warning lamp is coming on.Prompt correction should be neces-sary.
• Using low quality fuel could result inserious damage to the engine due tothe water or impurities in fuel. Neveruse low quality fuel.
• Before starting the engine, primingoperation must be performed.
• If the warning lamp still illuminatesafter draing the water, you shouldconsult a workshop to repair theproblem as soon as possible. We rec-ommend your authorised Chevroletrepairer.
2–22 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
N5W2002PL4W2251A
BOOT LID OPEN WARNING LAMP*(Saloon only)
Illuminates when the boot lid is open or notsecurely latched.
SWITCHES AND CONTROLSLIGHT SWITCH
To turn the head, tail and sidelights on oroff, twist the end of the combination switchlever.
The light switch has three positions whichactivate various lamp functions as follows:
• OFF: All the lights are off.
• : The sidelights, tail lamps, registra-tion plate lamps, and instrument panellamps are illuminated.
• : The low-beam headlamps and allof the above lamps are illuminated.
The headlamps will turn off automaticallywhen the ignition switch is turned to LOCKor ACC.
BATTERY SAVER
Battery saver is to prevent the battery frombeing discharged.
When you leave the light switch in the“ ” or “ ” position, remove the key,and open the driver’s door, the lights willturn off automatically.
NOTE
If you remove the key and open thedriver’s door when the dome lamp is“ON”, the dome lamp will not turn offautomatically.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS 2–23
N5W2003P
HIGH BEAM SWITCH
To turn the high-beam headlamps on:
• Make sure the low-beam headlamps areon.
• Push the combination switch lever to-ward the instrument panel.
The headlamp high-beam indicator illumi-nates when headlamps are on high beam.
To switch from high-beam headlamps tolow-beam, pull the combination switch le-ver back toward you, to its normal posi-tion.
CAUTION
• Always switch the high-beamheadlamps to low-beam when youapproach on coming vehicles or whenother vehicles ahead.
High-beam headlamps can temporarilyblind other drivers, which could resultin a collision.
N4G2281P
TURN SIGNAL LEVER
RIGHT turn: Move the turn signal leverup.
LEFT turn: Move the turn signal leverdown.
The turn signal will shut off automaticallyand the lever will return to its normal posi-tion after you have completed the turn.
When changing lanes, move the turn sig-nal lever part way and hold it there. Whenyou release the lever, it will return to itsnormal position.
2–24 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
N5W2004P
PASSING LIGHT SWITCH
To flash the high-beam headlamps, pull thecombination switch lever toward you andrelease it. The lever will return to its nor-mal position when you release it.
The high-beam headlamps will stay on aslong as you hold the combination switchlever toward you.
FRONT FOG LAMP SWITCH*
Fog lamps provide:
• Extra illumination to the sides of theroad ahead.
• Improved visibility in fog or snow.
To turn the fog lamps on:
• Make sure the light switch is in theor position.
• Turn the ring on the middle of the com-bination switch lever to ON.
The fog lamp indicator in the instrumentpanel illuminates when the fog lamps areturned on.
To turn the fog lamps off, turn the ring tothe OFF position.
REAR FOG LAMP SWITCH
To turn the rear fog lamp on, twist the endof the windscreen wiper/washer lever whenthe low beam head lamps are on.
The rear fog lamp indicator in the instru-ment panel illuminates when the rear foglamp is turned on.
To turn the rear fog lamp off, twist the endof the windscreen wiper/washer lever again.
N4G2301P N4G2311P
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS 2–25
To operate the windscreen wipers, turnthe ignition ON and move the windscreenwiper / washer lever upward.
The windscreen wipers operate in the fol-lowing four positions:
• OFF: System off. Default position.
• INT: Intermittent operation(Turn theband up and down to choose the desiredspeed). Lever up one level.
• LO: Continuous wipe, slow speed. Le-ver up two levels.
• HI: Continuous wipe, fast speed. Leverup three levels.
Misting function
To operate the windscreen wipers once incase of light rain or mist, lightly move thewindscreen wiper /washer lever toward theINT position and release it.
The lever will return automatically to itsnormal position when released.
The wipers will operate through one cycle.
NOTE
Wiper blades will wear out and not wipeproperly reducing forward vision.
• Replace worn wiper blades.
N4G2321P
WINDSCREEN WIPERS
CAUTION
• Less than clear vision for the driver canlead to an accident resulting in per-sonal injury and damage to your ve-hicle or other property.
• Do not operate the windscreen wip-ers when the windscreen is dry or ob-structed, as with snow or ice. Usingthe wipers on an obstructedwindscreen can damage the wiperblades, wiper motor, and glass.
• Check blades are not frozen to win-dows before operating in cold weather.Wiper operation while blade is frozencan damage wiper motor.
2–26 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
N4G2331P
Automatic wipe with rain sensor*
The rain sensor detects the amount of wa-ter on the windscreen and automaticallyregulates the windscreen wipers.
To operate the windscreen wipers automati-cally, move the windscreen wiper/washerlever toward the AUTO position.
The sensitivity of the system can be ad-justed using the adjuster wheel.
• Less sensitivity: turn the adjuster wheeldown.
• More sensitivity: turn the adjuster wheelup.
N4G2332P
To turn the system off, move thewindscreen wiper/washer lever toward theOFF position.
The windscreen wipers operate once underthe following conditions:
• When the ignition switch is turned ONin AUTO position of windscreen wiper/washer lever
• When the windscreen wiper/washer le-ver is moved to the AUTO position af-ter turning the ignition key to ON.
NOTE
The windshield wipers will be operatedfor 5 minutes when windshields wiper/washer lever remains in auto positionthough rain is over, but will not operateafter 5 minutes pass on.
NOTE
The windshield wipers are operated onetime when sense adjust switch is turningto one level from less sensitivity positionto more sensitivity position in rain day,but will not operate in case it doesn'train.
CAUTION
Switch off the windscreen wiper and au-tomatic operation with rain sensor in carwashes.
So as to ensure proper operation of the rainsensor, the sensor field must be free fromdust and dirt and the windscreen washersystem must be operated at regular inter-vals. Vehicles with rain sensor can be iden-tified by the sensor field near the top of thewindscreen.
Rain sensor
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS 2–27
To spray washer fluid on the windscreen:
• Turn the ignition ON.• Pull the windscreen wiper / washer lever
toward you.When you pull the lever for less than0.6 seconds, the following happens:• Washer fluid sprays onto the
windscreen. (The windscreen wipers donot operate)
When you pull the lever for more than0.6 seconds:• Washer fluid sprays onto the
windscreen.• The windscreen wipers operate for three
cycles or until you release the lever.
Washer fluid refill
For the recommended procedure for refill-ing your windscreen washer reservoir, see“WINDSCREEN WASHER FLUID” in theindex.
CAUTION
• Do not operate the windscreen washercontinuously for more than 10 sec-onds, or when the washer fluid tankis empty.
This can cause the washer motor tooverheat resulting in costly repairs.
WINDSCREEN WASHER
CAUTION
• Less than clear vision for the driver canlead to an accident resulting in per-sonal injury and damage to your ve-hicle or other property.
• Do not spray washer fluid on thewindscreen in freezing weather.
• Warm the windscreen before you op-erate the windscreen washer.
Washer fluid can form ice on a frozenwindscreen and obstruct your vision.
N4G2341Q
2–28 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
TAILGATE WINDOW WIPER ANDWASHER*
CAUTION
• Less than clear vision for the driver canlead to an accident resulting in per-sonal injury and damage to your ve-hicle or other property.
• Do not operate the tailgate windowwiper when the tailgate window is dryor obstructed, as with snow or ice.Using the wiper on an obstructedwindow can damage the wiper blades,wiper motor, and glass.
• Check blade is not frozen to windowbefore operating in cold weather.Wiper operation while blade is frozencan damage wiper motor.
To operate the tailgate wiper and washerpush the lever toward the instrument panel.
In the first position, wiper will operate con-tinuously at slow speed. In some models,wiper will operate intermittently.
To spray the washer fluid, push the leverto the second position.
CAUTION
• Do not operate the tailgate windowwasher continuously for more than10 seconds, or when the washer fluidtank is empty.
This can cause the washer motor tooverheat resulting in costly repairs.
CAUTION
• Do not spray washer fluid on the tail-gate window in freezing weather.
• Warm the tailgate window before youoperate the tailgate window washer.
Washer fluid can form ice on a frozentailgate window and obstruct your vi-sion.
N4W2361P
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS 2–29
REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDE MIRRORDEFROSTER BUTTON
CAUTION
Do not use the rear window defrosterunder the following conditions:• Engine is not running.• You are just starting your vehicle.• There is a buildup of snow or ice on
the rear window.If you use your vehicle’s rear window de-froster under these conditions, you candischarge your vehicle’s battery.This can damage your vehicle, requiringthe replacement of some parts.
N4W2381A
HAZARD WARNING FLASHER BUTTON
Use hazard warning flashers in the follow-ing situations:
• To warn others of emergency conditions.
• When your vehicle is in a traffic hazard.
You can operate the hazard flash functionwith the ignition ON or OFF.
To activate the hazard warning flashers,push the hazard warning flasher button.
To turn off the flashers, push the buttonagain.
(Saloon)
(Hatchback/Wagon)
Washer fluid refill
For the recommended procedure for refill-ing your windscreen washer reservoir, see“WINDSCREEN WASHER FLUID” in theindex.
2–30 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
To turn the defroster on, turn the ignitionto ON and push the rear window and out-side mirror defroster button. The indicatorlight in the button will illuminate.
The defroster will be automatically turnedoff after approximately 10 minutes.
To turn the defroster off, push the buttonagain.
Make sure you turn the defroster off afterachieving clear vision.
Windscreen heating*
Your vehicle has a heated front windscreenwhich can be used to defrost it. This featurewill only work when the ignition is turnedto ON.
There is a heated element along the bottomof the windscreen used to heat thewindscreen.
Press the rear window and outside mirrordefroster button to heat the windscreen. Anindicator light in the button will come onto let you know that the feature is activated.
The front windscreen heater will turn offabout 10 minutes after the button ispressed. It can also be turned off by press-ing the button again or by turning off theengine.
DIMMER SWITCH
The dimmer switch controls the brightnessof the instrument panel lamps.
To brighten the panel illumination, rotatethe dial upward.
To dim the illumination, rotate the dial tothe down.
N4W2391P
CAUTION
Lack of proper maintenance can dam-age your vehicle’s defroster wires orscratch the glass.• Do not use sharp instruments or abra-
sive window cleaners on your vehicle’srear window.
• Do not scratch or damage the de-froster wires when you clean or workaround the rear window.
Less than clear vision for the driver canlead to an accident resulting in personalinjuries and damage to your vehicle orother property.
J221_02_EN-R.pmd 2007-02-15, 13:5630
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS 2–31
NOTE
In case of loss, replacement keys are avail-able from your authorised Chevroletrepairer by quoting the key number andvehicle identification number(VIN).
See “IDENTIFICATION NUMBERS”in the index to know where you can findthe VIN.
To protect your car from theft, an elec-tronic immobilisation system has beeninstalled in your vehicle. Only keys withthe correct electronic code can be usedto start the car. Even if a key has the sameprofile it will not start the engine if theelectronic code is incorrect. Always ob-tain replacement or additional keys fromyour authorised Chevrolet repairer.
See “IMMOBILISER” in the index.
N4W2421B
WARNING
Do not leave the key in the vehicle.
• Lock the vehicle.• Take the key with you.
KEYSTwo keys are provided with your new ve-hicle.
Keep one of the two keys as a spare. Thekey number is stamped on the key numberplate. For vehicle security, keep the keynumber plate in a safe place, not in the ve-hicle. You should also record the key num-ber in a safe place, not in the vehicle.
This deters unauthorised persons from ob-taining a duplicate key.
Key number plate
HEADLAMP LEVELLING SWITCH
With the low beam switched on, adjustheadlamp range to suit the vehicle load.
0 = Front seat occupied
1 = All seats occupied
2 = Driver’s seat occupied and load in theluggage compartment
3 = All seats occupied and load in the lug-gage compartment
N4W2401P
2–32 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
N6G2002A
PARKING
LED LOCK
UNLOCK
N6G2001A
UNLOCK
TRUNK
LED LOCK
KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM*The keyless entry system lets you lock andunlock the doors within range of about 20feet (6m) away from your vehicle using thetransmitter.
The LED on the transmitter flashes to showthat it is operational.
• LOCK button: Locks all doors. Hazardlamps will flash once.
• UNLOCK button: Unlocks all doors.Hazard lamps will flash twice.
• BOOT button: Releases the boot lidwhen pressed for about 1 second.
(Saloon)
NOTE
The operating range of the transmitterwill vary due to environmental condi-tions.
NOTE
All of the remote buttons are disabledwhen the key is placed in the ignition.
(Hatchback/Wagon)
• PARKING button (Hatchback/Wagon):Hazard lamps will flash for about 28seconds. Press this button again to turnoff the hazard lamps.
DOOR LOCK
1. Close all windows.
2. Turn the ignition key to LOCK and re-move the key.
3. Have all passengers exit the vehicle.
4. Close all doors, bonnet and boot.
5. Press and release the door lock buttonon the transmitter.
The LED on the transmitter will flashonce.
• All doors lock.
• Hazard warning lamps flash once.
If the key is inserted into the ignition keyhole, the transmitter will not operate thedoor locking system.
NOTE
The system can be activated even if thewindows are open. Close all the win-dows and doors before leaving the ve-hicle.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS 2–33
TRANSMITTER
Every transmitter is electronically coded toprevent another transmitter from unlock-ing your vehicle.
If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacementcan be purchased from your authorisedChevrolet repairer.
If you need a new transmitter or extras,bring the remaining transmitter with youwhen you go to your authorised Chevroletrepairer. When the authorised Chevroletrepairer matches the replacement transmit-ter to your vehicle, the remaining transmit-ter must also be matched to the new code.
Once the new transmitter is electronicallycoded, the lost transmitter will not unlockyour vehicle.
Up to 4 transmitters can be matched toyour vehicle at a same time.
DOOR UNLOCK
1. Unlock the driver’s door with a key.
2. Press and release the door unlock but-ton on the transmitter.
• The LED on the transmitter will flashonce.
• All the doors unlock.
• Hazard warning lamps flash twice.
Auto door lock
If the door is not opened or the engine isnot started within 30 seconds after disarm-ing the system using the transmitter, all thedoors are automatically locked.
WARNING
• Do not use the transmitter to lock thevehicle if anyone is to be left inside thevehicle.
• Never leave children or pets unat-tended in your vehicle. The tempera-ture inside the vehicle can increasemore rapidly and reach much higherlevels than the temperature outside.
This can result in serious injury ordeath.
2–34 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
N5D2047A
Battery replacement
If the LED fails to illuminate, the transmit-ter can still be used for a while. However, itis an indication that a new battery isneeded.
NOTE
Use CR1616 (or equivalent) replacementbattery.
1. Remove the screw from the back of thecover.
2. Open the transmitter cover.
3. Pull the transmitter unit out of the coverand open the cover of the transmitterunit.
4. Remove the used battery. Avoid touch-ing the circuit board to other compo-nents.
5. Install the new battery. Be sure the posi-tive side (+) faces up.
6. Close the cover of the transmitter unitand put the unit in the cover of thetransmitter.
7. Assemble the transmitter cover.
8. Check the operation of the transmitterwith your vehicle.
CAUTION
Avoid touching the flat surfaces of thebattery with your bare fingers. Handlingwill shorten battery life.
NOTE
Used lithium batteries can harm the en-vironment.
• Follow local recycling laws for dis-posal.
• Do not discard with household refuse.
NOTE
In order to keep the transmitter work-ing properly, follow these guidelines:
• Avoid dropping the transmitter.• Do not place heavy objects on the
transmitter.• Keep the transmitter away from wa-
ter and direct sunlight. If the transmit-ter gets wet, wipe it with a soft cloth.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS 2–35
N5W2005P N4W2442A
To lock any door from the inside, push inon the door lock button.
To unlock any door from the inside, pullout on the lock button.
NOTE
The driver’s door lock button cannot bepushed when the door is open. Thisprevents locking the driver’s door whenyou leave the key inside your car bymistake.
LOCK
UNLOCK
To lock the doors from outside using thekey, insert the key and turn it counterclock-wise.
To unlock, turn the key clockwise.
UNLOCK
LOCK
WARNING
The temperature inside vehicle can in-crease rapidly and reach much higherlevels than temperature outside.
• Do not leave unattended children orpets in your vehicle.
Death or serious injury can occur.
Children can operate electric windows,other controls, or move vehicle.
• Do not leave key in vehicle with chil-dren.
These actions can result in serious in-jury or death.
DOOR LOCKS
CAUTION
• Lock all doors and take the key withyou when you leave vehicle unat-tended.
Unlocked vehicles invite theft.
2–36 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
You can also lock or unlock the doors withthe door lock switch* on the driver’s doortrim pad.
Press the left part of the switch to lock thedoors.
To unlock the doors, press the right partof the switch.
N4G2403P N5W2006P
CENTRAL DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM*
You can activate the central door lockingsystem from the driver’s door. This systemallows you to lock and unlock all the doorsfrom the driver’s door, using either the keyor keyless remote (from outside) or thedoor lock button (from inside).
To open a door, pull the door handle.
NOTE
Grease should be applied to the doorcheck latch and hinge at regular intervalsor if a noise can be heard when open-ing, closing the door or during driving.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS 2–37
To open a rear door when the child secu-rity door lock is activated, unlock the doorfrom the inside and open the door from theoutside.
To cancel the child security door lock, movethe lever down to the “UNLOCK” posi-tion.
N4W2462A
To activate the child security door locks:
1. Open the rear door you intend to lock.
2. Locate the child security lock lever on thedoor edge, near the centre.
3. Slide the lever to the LOCK position.
NOTE
Each rear door has its own lock.
Each rear door child security lock mustbe activated manually and separately, leftand right.
UNLOCK
LOCK
N4G2421P
CHILD SECURITY DOOR LOCK
Your car has a child security door lock oneach rear door. These locks prevent passen-gers, especially children, from accidentallyopening the rear doors from the inside bypulling the door handle.
CAUTION
• Do not pull the inside door handlewhile the child security door lock is setto “LOCK” position.
To do so can damage the inside doorhandle.
Do not pull
2–38 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
WARNING
Children can operate and become en-trapped in electric windows.
• Do not leave your keys or unattendedchildren in your car.
Serious injury or death can occur frommisuse of electric windows.
ELECTRIC WINDOWS*You may operate the electric windowswhen the ignition switch is ON by using theelectric window switches on each doorpanel.
NOTE
The rear windows do not open fully.
WARNING
Body parts outside vehicle can be struckby passing objects.
• Keep all parts of body inside vehicle.
To raise the window, lift up on the switch.
To lower the window, press down on theswitch.
Release the switch when the windowreaches the desired position.
N4G2431P
AUTO DOWN
The driver’s window has an auto downfunction.
To lower the window, press down firmly,then release the switch. The window willopen automatically until it is fully open. Tostop the window while it is opening, pressthe switch again.
To raise the window, pull up and hold theswitch. To stop the window, release theswitch.
N4G2441P
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS 2–39
N5W2007A
WARNING
Unattended vehicle with open windowscan assist car crime.
• Close all windows when leaving ve-hicle.
MANUAL WINDOWSTo raise or lower the windows, rotate thewindow regulator handle in the door panel.
Items can get trapped in windows. Ensurewindow opening is clear before closing win-dows.
WARNING
Body parts outside vehicle can be struckby passing objects.
• Keep all parts of body inside vehicle.
close
open
WARNING
Children can operate and become en-trapped in electric windows. Serious in-jury or death can occur.
• Use electric window lock when chil-dren are in back seat.
ELECTRIC WINDOW LOCK BUTTON
The electric window lock button allows youto lock the rear and passenger window but-tons. With the lock on, the rear and pas-senger windows can only be operated fromthe driver’s window control panel.
N4G2451P
NOTE
The rear windows do not open fully.
2–40 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
N5W2008A
BOOT LID (Saloon)To unlock the boot lid, insert the key andturn it clockwise. Lift the boot lid open.
To close boot lid, push it down so it latchessecurely. It locks automatically.
Make sure your hands and any other bodyparts, as well as those of other persons, arecompletely away from the boot closure area.
U N -
LOCK
WARNING
Driving vehicle with boot lid open canallow exhaust gases to enter passengercompartment.
• Do not drive with boot lid open. Ifyou must drive this way, close win-dows, place in ‘FRESH AIR MODE’,and run blower at high speed. (See“VENTILATION” in the index)
Exhaust gases are usually poisonousand can cause injury or death.
CAUTION
When opening or closing the tailgate besure to check it is free from obstructions.
BOOT LID RELEASE BUTTONYou can also open the boot lid by pressingthe boot lid release button located in thedriver’s door trim.
WARNING
• Do not operate the boot lid releasebutton while the vehicle is moving.
• Do not operate the vehicle with theboot lid open.
An open boot lid obscures your rearview. Operating your vehicle with anobstructed rear view can result in a col-lision causing damage to your vehicle orother property, personal injury, or evendeath.
N4G2481P
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS 2–41
WARNING
Driving the vehicle with the tailgate opencan allow exhaust gases to enter passen-ger compartment.
• Do not drive with tailgate open. If youmust drive this way, close windows,place in ‘FRESH AIR MODE’, andrun blower at high speed. (See “VEN-TILATION” in the index)
Exhaust gases are usually toxic and cancause injury or death.
CAUTION
When opening or closing the tailgate besure to check it is free from obstructions.
To open the tailgate, pull up the handleabove the registration plate and lift the tail-gate.
To close the tailgate, push it down firmlyso it latches securely.
N4W2523AN5W2009A
TAILGATE (Hatchback/Wagon)To unlock the tailgate, insert the key andturn it counterclockwise.
To lock the tailgate using the key, turn thekey clockwise.
The tailgate can also be locked or unlockedby central door locking system*. See “Cen-tral Door Locking System” in the index.
UNLOCK LOCK
2–42 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
BONNETTo open the bonnet:
1. Pull bonnet release handle located at thelower left side of the instrument panel.
N4G2491P N5W2002A
2. Reach under front edge of the bonnetand lift bonnet release up.
N6W2001P
3. Disengage the bonnet support rod fromretaining clip.
Rotate the rod up and insert the free endsecurely into the socket on the undersideof the bonnet.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS 2–43
INTERIOR COURTESY LAMPS
WARNING
• Avoid using the dome lamp and maplights while driving in the dark.
A lit passenger compartment reduces vis-ibility in the dark, and could cause acollision.
WARNING
Always observe the following precau-tions:
• Pull on the front edge of the bonnetto make sure it is latched securely be-fore you drive your vehicle.
• Do not pull the bonnet release handlewhile your vehicle is moving.
• Do not move your vehicle with thebonnet open. An open bonnet will ob-scure the driver’s vision.
Operating your vehicle with the bonnetopen can lead to a collision resulting indamage to your vehicle to other prop-erty, personal injury or even death.
N6W2002P
To close the bonnet:
1. While holding the bonnet to keep it fromfalling, remove the support rod from thesocket and secure it firmly back into itsretaining clip.
2. Make sure hands and other body parts,as well as those of other persons, arecompletely away from the engine com-partment and bonnet-to-body edges.
3. Lower the bonnet, allowing it to dropfrom a height of about 30 cm (1 foot).
4. Make sure the bonnet is locked firmlyin place.
2–44 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
DOME LAMP
The centre dome lamp operates in three po-sitions:
• ON: The lamp comes on and stays onuntil shut off manually.
• CENTRED: The lamp comes on whenyou open a door. After all doors areclosed, the lamp stays on for 7 seconds,and then goes out. (Saloon/Wagon)The lamp comes on when you open adoor and off after doors are closed.(Hatchback)
• OFF: The lamp remains off, even whendoors are open.
N4W2551A
MAP LIGHT
Push the button to illuminate the front maplight.
Push again to turn off the light.
N4W2561A
ELECTRIC SUNROOF*You may operate the electric sunroof whenthe ignition is ON.
CAUTION
Always observe the following precau-tions:
• Do not stick body parts or objects outthe sunroof opening.
• Make sure the sunroof opening isclear, inside and outside, before open-ing or closing the sunroof.
• Do not place heavy objects on oraround the sunroof.
• Keep debris off the outside of thesunroof.
• When leaving the vehicle unattended,close sunroof fully.
As in all other times, all occupants mustwear their safety belts whether thesunroof is open or closed.
Failure to observe these precautions canresult in injury or damage to your ve-hicle.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS 2–45
DIGITAL CLOCKWhen the ignition is ACC or ON, the digi-tal clock displays the time. The digital clockhas three adjusting buttons.
H: Hour button.
• To advance 1 hour, press the H button.
• To advance more than 1 hour, press andhold the H button until you reach thecorrect hour.
M: Minute button.
• To advance 1 minute, press the M but-ton.
• To advance more than 1 minute, pressand hold the M button until you reachthe correct minute.
N4W2591AN4W2581A
UPDOWN
TILTING THE SUNROOF
• To tilt the sunroof up, press the frontpart of the switch.
• To return the sunroof to its originalposition, press and hold the rear part ofthe switch.
Release the switch when the sunroofreaches the desired position.
N4W2571A
CLOSE
OPEN
SLIDING THE SUNROOF
• To open the sunroof, press the rear partof the switch. It will open automaticallyuntil you press either the front or rearpart of the switch again.
• To close the sunroof, press and hold thefront part of the switch.
Release the switch when the sunroofreaches the desired position.
2–46 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
NOTE
Remember to reset your vehicle’s clockeach time you disconnect and then re-connect the battery or replace a fuse.
S: Set button.
To reset the time to the nearest hour, pressthe S button.
• If you press this button when the timeis between 8:00 and 8:29 for example,the display will reset to 8:00.
• If you press this button while the timeis between 8:30 and 8:59 for example,the display will reset to 9:00.
CIGARETTE LIGHTER ANDACCESSORY POWER OUTLET
CAUTION
The barrel of an operating cigarettelighter can become very hot.
• Do not touch the barrel of the ciga-rette lighter and do not allow childrento operate or play with the cigarettelighter.
This hot metal can cause personal inju-ries and damage to your vehicle or otherproperty.
N4G2551P
To operate the cigarette lighter:
• Turn the ignition switch to ACC or ON.
• Push the lighter in all the way.
The cigarette lighter will pop out automati-cally when it is ready to use.
CAUTION
Overheating the cigarette lighter candamage the heating element and thelighter itself.
• Do not hold the lighter in while it isheating.
This can cause the lighter to overheat.
CAUTION
Trying to operate a malfunctioning ciga-rette lighter can be dangerous.
• If the heated cigarette lighter does notpop out within 30 seconds, pull it outand ask a workshop to repair it. Werecommend your authorisedChevrolet repairer.
It can cause injuries and damage to yourvehicle.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS 2–47
N5W2011A
CAUTION
Battery can be discharged
• Turn off any electrical equipmentwhen not in use for an extended peri-ods.
This will prevent damage to your bat-tery.
NOTE
Maximum load limit for your poweroutlet is 12V-10A. If you apply anyelectrical equipment which exceeds12V-10A, power supply will be auto-matically cut off. Only use equipmentwithin the specifications.
The automatic cut off will reset after10 minutes.
(Wagon only)
N5W2007P
ACCESSORY POWER OUTLET
Power outlets can be used to plug in elec-trical equipments such as cellular phone,electric shaver, etc.
Accessory power outlet is in the centre con-sole below the front ashtray. Another poweroutlet is located on the left side of luggagecompartment only in the Wagon models.
Pull the cap out to use the power outlet.When not in use, replace it. The accessorypower outlet is operational when the igni-tion switch is in ACC or ON.
2–48 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
ASHTRAYS
CAUTION
Cigarettes and other smoking materialscould set them on fire.
• Do not put paper or other flammableitems in the ashtray.
An ashtray fire can lead to personal in-jury or damage to your vehicle or otherproperty.
FRONT ASHTRAY
To open the front ashtray, pull it towardyou.
To close the front ashtray, push it back inuntil it is closed.
To empty the front ashtray, follow thisprocedure:
1. Pull the ashtray all the way toward you.
2. Lift the inner case up and then pull it out.
N4W2621A
REAR ASHTRAY*
Installed in the rear of the centre console.
Open by swinging the upper edge of the liddown.
After using the ashtray, close it completely.
To empty the ashtray:
1. Open the ashtray fully.
2. Depress the retaining spring in.
3. Tip and pull out the ashtray.
To install the ashtray:
1. Attach the ashtray at the bottom.
2. Push the ashtray back into place.
N4W2631A
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS 2–49
N5W2010P
GLOVE BOXOpen the glove box by pulling the bottomof the handle upward and the glove boxlamp will be turned on. Close the glove boxwith a firm push and the glove box lampwill be turned off.
To lock the glove box door, insert the igni-tion key into the lock cylinder and turn itclockwise. Turn the key counterclockwise tounlock the door.
CUP HOLDERSThe cup holders are located in the centreconsole and rear seat centre armrest.
You can use the front cup holder by swing-ing the inner support forward or back-ward.
To use the rear cup holder*, swing downthe rear centre armrest.
N4W2651A
HORNTo sound the horn, press the horn symbolon either side of your vehicle’s steeringwheel centre pad.
The horn will sound regardless of ignitionswitch position.
N4W2641B
2–50 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
CAUTION
In the case of a collision or a suddenstop, an open glove box presents a haz-ard.
• Do not drive with the glove box open.An open glove box can cause personalinjuries or damage to your vehicle in caseof a collision.
The inner partition can be removed if youwant to store larger items.
After taking inner partition off, keep it inthe right side groove of the glove box.
N4G2622P
NOTE
In cold weather, cold air flows in thepassenger compartment through anopening when setting recirculation modeto outside air mode.
Turn the adjustment wheel counterclock-wise.
GLOVE BOX COOLING*
Cooled air is fed into the glove box throughan opening when turning on the air condi-tioning (A/C).
If glove box cooling is not required, turnthe adjustment wheel counterclockwise.
N4G2621P
open
closecooled air opening
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS 2–51
CONSOLE BOXTo open the console box, pull up on thelever and lift lid.
To closed the console box, lower the lid andpush it down until it latches.
N4G2661P
COIN STORAGETo open the coin storage, pull the handleon the coin storage door toward you.
To close the coin storage, firmly push thecoin storage door shut.
N4W2691PN5W2011P
CAUTION
If you give an extreme force to lower de-posit box, it can be damaged.
• Do not put your leg on the lower de-posit box.
LOWER DEPOSIT BOXYour vehicle has the deposit box below theglove box.
2–52 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
SEATBACK SHOPPING HOOKYour vehicle is equipped with seatbackshopping hooks on each front seatback.
Hang your shopping bag or other suitableobjects on the hook at your convenience.
SUNGLASS HOLDER*To open the sunglass holder above thedriver’s door, pull down and hold the up-per part of the cover.
The sunglass holder will swing up auto-matically when releasing it.
N4G2701P
FRONT PASSENGER SEATUNDERTRAY*To use the front passenger seat undertray,pull the end of the tray toward the instru-ment panel.
N4G2691P
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS 2–53
CAUTION
Hanging items on your vehicle’s assistgrips can obstruct the driver’s view.
• Do not hang anything on the assistgrips, unless they are equipped with acoat hook.
Obstructing the driver’s view can lead toan accident resulting in personal injuriesand damage to your vehicle or otherproperty.
ASSIST GRIP WITH COAT HOOKYour vehicle has assist grips above thefront seat passenger’s door and the reardoors. The grips above the rear door in-clude coat hooks.
To use the assist grips, pull down and holdit. The grips will swing up automaticallywhen releasing it.
Passengers can use the grips for assistancein entering / exiting the vehicle, or for hand-holds during spirited driving.
N4W2761A
SUN VISORSYour vehicle has padded sun visors to pro-tect the driver and passengers from glare.
You can swing the sun visors up and down,and to the side.
The vanity mirror and ticket holder arelocatd on the back of the sun visors.
N4G2711P
2–54 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
CAUTION
• Do not put passengers in the area be-hind the net.
• Do not load cargo in the area higherthan the net’s upper end.
• Do not load heavy cargo in the areahigher than the seatback to avoid ac-cident even if the net is installed.
• Do not load cargo which has a sharpedge that can pass through the net.
• Do not apply excessive force to the netby hanging or by suspending heavycargo.
SECURITY BARRIER NET(Wagon only)Your vehicle has a security barrier net de-signed to help keep larger loads from fall-ing over. The barrier net has installationpossibilities in the two locations, one frontinstallation and one rear installation.
INSTALLATION LOCATIONS
Upper side fixing point
There are two hook holders on each roofside rail portion.
Lower front and rear side fixing point
Below two outer seat cushions and on thefloor at the trunk deck front end portionyou also find two hook holders.
N5W2012A N5W2013A
N5W2014A
(Lower front side fixing point)
(Lower rear side fixing point)
(front) (rear)
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS 2–55
N5W2022AN5W2018A
4. Pull the straps in order to take up theslack.
REAR INSTALLATION
To install the barrier net in the rear side,do the followings:
1. Remove the blind shaft by pulling its twohandles up without folding down therear seatbacks.
2. Insert the net shaft into the large holeson rear roof side rail portion and thensecure by sliding into the small hole.
3. Hang the strap hooks in the two hookholders of the trunk deck floor.
FRONT INSTALLATION
To install the barrier net in the front side toincrease luggage space, do the followings:1. Fold down the rear seatback. See
“FOLDING REAR SEATBACK” earlierin this section.
2. Remove the rear head restraints. See“HEAD RESTRAINTS” earlier in thissection.
3. Insert the net shaft into the large holesnext to the assist grips and then secureby sliding into the small hole.
4. Hang the strap hooks in the two hookholders below two outer seat cushions.
5. Pull the straps in order to take up theslack.
N5W2015A
2–56 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
N5W2021A
CAUTION
Make sure that there is no slack in thenet by pulling the strap securely when in-stalling the net. The strap should bepulled after confirming that the hook isinserted into the hook holder securely.
N5W2019A
REMOVAL METHOD
1. Loosen the straps by pulling up the strapadjusters and remove the strap hooksfrom the hook holders.
2. Remove the net shaft by pulling it intothe larger holes.
N5W2016A
LUGGAGE STORAGE AREA(Wagon only)FLOOR NET*
The floor net can help keep small loadsfrom moving during sharp turns or quickstarts and stops.
Hang the four net hooks in the metal ringson the each corner of the floor.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS 2–57
N5W2023A
SIDE DEPOSIT BOX
Side deposit boxes are located in the left andright side of luggage area.
To open the side deposit box, pull thehandle on the side deposit box door.
To close it, firmly push the door.
N5W2020A
UNDER FLOOR STORAGE
There are various bins under the luggagecompartment floor. To access the floor bins,pull floor mat handle upward.
CAUTION
Do not allow items in the bins to extendabove the top of the bin. Otherwise, thebin or luggage floor may be damaged.
LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT COVER
Luggage or other cargo placed in the lug-gage compartment can be hidden from viewby a luggage compartment cover.
To operate the cover, pull the handle of thecover toward you and then insert the re-tainer into the slot located on both sides ofthe tailgate openings.
To remove the cover, release the handle af-ter pulling it toward you a little. The coverretracts automatically.
N5W2017A
2–58 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
ROOF RACK* (Wagon only)The roof rack can be used to convenientlycarry additional cargo, or bulky items, suchas bicycles, which are better carried outsidethan inside.
CAUTION
A loaded roof rack changes the vehicle’scentre of gravity. Do not drive at highspeeds. Take precautions when drivingin crosswinds. Failure to follow this cau-tion can result in vehicle damage andpersonal injury.
ANTENNAIn the Notchback models, antenna is inte-grated with the rear window defogger, lo-cated in the rear window, while in theHatchback and Wagon models, it is locatedin the windshield glass. Be sure that theinside surface of the rear window or wind-shield glass is not scratched and that thelines on the glass are not damaged. If theinside surface is damaged, it could interferewith radio reception.
Because this antenna is built into your rearwindow or windshield glass, there is a re-duced risk of damage caused by car washes.
CAUTION
Using a razor blade or sharp object toclear the inside rear window or wind-shield glass may damage the antennaand/or the rear window defogger. Re-pairs would not be covered by yourwarranty. Do not clear the inside rearwindow with sharp objects.
CAUTION
Do not apply aftermarket glass tintingwith metallic film. The metallic film insome tinting materials will interfere withor distort the incoming radio reception.Any damage caused to your backglassantenna due to metallic tinting materialswill not be covered by your warranty.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS 2–59
J200M235
SEAT HEATER SWITCH*The seat heater switches are located in thecenter console.
To warm the seat:
1. Turn the ignition key on.
2. Press the right of the driver's seat heaterswitch or the left of the passenger's seatheater switch that you want to warm.
Indicator in the button will be illumi-nated.
3. To turn off the seat heater, press the op-posite of heating positon.
WARNING
You may get burnt.
• Do not use the seat heater for a longtime if you are wearing a thin skirtor trousers.
CAUTION
Heating wires can be damaged.
• Do not subject the front seats to heavyimpact.
CRUISE CONTROL*If your vehicle has cruise control, you canmaintain a speed of about 39 km/h ormore without keeping your foot on the ac-celerator. This can really help on long trips.Cruise control does not work at speedsbelow 39 km/h.
When you apply your brakes, or the clutchpedal if you have a manual transaxle, thecruise control shuts off.
N7W2001B
2–60 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Setting Cruise Control
CAUTION
If you leave your cruise control on whenyou are not using cruise, you might hita button and go into cruise when youdo not want to. You could be startledand even lose control. Keep the cruisecontrol switch off until you want to usecruise control.
The cruise control pad is located on theright side of the steering wheel.
1. Press the ON/OFF button to turn cruisecontrol on.
2. Accelerate to the speed you want.
3. Press the SET button and release it. Anindicator light on the instrument panelcluster will come on to show you thatthe cruise control is on.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
Resuming a Set Speed
Suppose you set your cruise control at adesired speed and then you apply the brakepedal, or the clutch pedal if you have amanual transaxle. This, of course, shuts offthe cruise control. But you do not need toreset it. Once you are going about 39 km/h or more, you can tap the RESUME but-ton.
You will go right back up to your chosenspeed and stay there.
If you hold in the RESUME button longer,the vehicle will keep going faster until yourelease the button or apply the brake pedal.
So unless you want to go faster, do not holdin the RESUME button.
CAUTION
Cruise control can be dangerous whereyou cannot drive safely at a steadyspeed. So, do not use your cruise controlon winding roads or in heavy traffic.
Cruise control can be dangerous on slip-pery roads. On such roads, fast changesin tire traction can cause excessive wheelslip, and you could lose control. Do notuse cruise control on slippery roads.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS 2–61
Increasing Speed While Using CruiseControl
There are two ways to go to a higher speed:
• Use the accelerator pedal to get to ahigher speed. Press the SET button, thenrelease the button and the accelera- torpedal. You will now cruise at the higherspeed.
• Press the RESUME button. Hold it thereuntil you get up to the speed you want,and then release the button. To increaseyour speed in very small amounts, tapthe RESUME button and the release it.Each time you do this, your vehicle willgo about 2 km/h faster. The acceleratefeature will only work after you turn onthe cruise control by pressing the SETbutton.
Reducing Speed While Using CruiseControl
There are two ways to reduce your speedwhile using cruise control:
• Press the SET button until you reach thelower speed you want, then release it.
• To slow down in very small amounts,tap the SET button. Each time you dothis, you will go about 2 km/h slower.
Passing Another Vehicle While UsingCruise Control
Use the accelerator pedal to increase yourspeed. When you take your foot off thepedal, your vehicle will slow down to thecruise control speed you set earlier.
Using Cruise Control on Hills
How well your cruise control will work onhills depends upon your speed, load andthe steepness of the hills. When going upsteep hills, you may have to step on theaccelerator pedal to maintain your speed.When going downhill, you may have tobrake or shift to a lower gear to keep youspeed down. Of course, applying the brakepedal takes you out of cruise control. Manydrivers find this to be too much trouble anddo not use cruise control on steep hills.
2–62 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Disengaging Cruise Control
There are two ways to turn off the cruisecontrol:
• Step lightly on the brake pedal, or pressthe clutch pedal, if you have a manualtransaxle.
• Press the ON/OFF button on the cruisecontrol pad.
Erasing Speed Memory
When you turn off the cruise control or theignition, your cruise control set speedmemory is erased.
DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE 3–1
DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE3• RUNNING-IN ........................................................ 3-2
• DRIVING PRECAUTIONS ...................................... 3-2
• FUEL ...................................................................... 3-4
• ADJUSTING THE MIRRORS .................................. 3-7
• ADJUSTING THE STEERING WHEEL .................. 3-10
• SPEED SENSITIVE POWERSTEERING SYSTEM .............................................. 3-11
• IGNITION SWITCH ............................................. 3-11
• STARTING THE ENGINE ...................................... 3-12
• DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE ................................... 3-15
• BRAKES ............................................................... 3-22
• TRACTION CONTROL SYSTEM .......................... 3-25
• TURBOCHARGER SYSTEM ................................. 3-26
• DRIVING TIPS ..................................................... 3-27
• TRAILER TOWING .............................................. 3-30
• ENGINE EXHAUST (CARBON MONOXIDE) ....... 3-35
• ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION ....................... 3-36
3–2 DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING
• Make sure all exterior light bulbs,lamps, signalling systems, and warn-ing indicators are clean and workingproperly.
These precautions help to avoid acci-dents that could result in personal in-jury or damage to the vehicle.
RUNNING-INUse the following precautions for the firstfew hundred miles (kilometres) to improvethe performance and economy of your ve-hicle and add to its long life:
• Avoid full-throttle starts.
• Allow the engine to warm up beforedriving.
• Do not race the engine.
• Avoid hard stops except in emergencies.This will allow your brakes to bed inproperly.
• Avoid quick starts, sudden accelerations,and prolonged high-speed driving inorder to avoid damage to the engine andto conserve fuel.
• Avoid full-throttle acceleration in lowgear.
• Do not tow any other vehicle.
DRIVING PRECAUTIONSBEFORE ENTERING THE VEHICLE
• Be sure all windows, inside and outsiderearview mirrors, light bulbs, and lampsare clean and working properly.
• Check under the vehicle for leaks.
• Check the levels of engine oil and otherfluids in the engine compartment.
• Visually check the tyres for damage orimproper inflation pressures and forforeign objects imbedded in the tread.
• Take corrective actions as required.
BEFORE DRIVING
WARNING
Loose objects on the instrument panelor rear window shelf can obstruct yourvision.
• Remove any loose objects on the in-strument panel or on the rear win-dow shelf.
These objects can also be thrownaround and strike passengers duringhard braking or a collision, causing per-sonal injury or damage to your vehicle.
• Be sure you understand your vehicle, itsequipment and its safe operation.
• Adjust your seat to a comfortable posi-tion.
• Adjust the inside and outside mirrors.
• Be sure all occupants of the vehicle havefastened their safety belts.
• Check the operation of the warninglights as the ignition key is turned ON.
DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE 3–3
WARNING
• Be sure all occupants have fastenedtheir safety belts before starting todrive.
• Be sure all windows, rearview mir-rors, light bulbs and lamps are cleanand operational.
• Check all the gauges.
• Release the handbrake, making sure thewarning lamp goes out.
WHILE DRIVING
As the driver of your vehicle, you are re-sponsible for the safety of yourself, yourpassengers and others sharing the roadwith you. To discharge that responsibility,you must keep your full attention on oper-ating the vehicle. Most vehicular collisionsare caused when a driver’s concentration iseither impaired or distracted. At all times,the driver’s concentration should be uponthe road, nearby vehicles and other objects.
One significant distraction in today’s driv-ing environment is the use of hand-heldphones while driving. Studies have foundthat the use of hand-held phones whiledriving increases the risk of being involv-ing in an accident. At least one scientificstudy found that use of any phone sys-tem— either hand-held or hands-free—increases the risk of a collision by 400%.
Using phones, two-way radios or other elec-tronic devices such as computers,organisers, games, video, or GPS and othernavigational aids similarly increases the riskof collision. We discourage your use of
equipment while you are operating yourvehicle.
Legislation has been enacted or is underconsideration in some countries prohibit-ing the use of hand-held phones while op-erating a motor vehicle.
WARNING
Driving safely requires all of your con-centration as well as the application ofgood judgement and common sense.Avoid or minimize distractions whileoperating your vehicle. Distractions youmay encounter could include:
• responding to calls on your cell orcar phone;
• initiating calls on your cell or carphone;
• making adjustments to your seat,steering wheel or mirrors;
• using other electronic devices;• referring to maps or other written
materials;(Continued)
3–4 DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE
FUELFUEL RECOMMENDATIONS
Use only unleaded fuel rated at RON95 orhigher.
Fuel quality and additives contained in fuelhave a significant effect on power output,driveability, and life of the engine.
Fuel with too low an octane number cancause engine knock.
CAUTION
• Use of fuel with an octane numberlower than RON95 may damage en-gine.
• Use of leaded fuel will damage exhaustsystem and invalidate the warranty.
NOTE
To prevent accidental use of leaded fuel,the nozzles for leaded fuel are larger, andwill not fit the fuel filler neck of yourvehicle.
WARNING
(Continued)• removing or connecting your
safety belt;• searching for change approaching
toll booths; or• other activities that divert your
attention from the task of safevehicular operation.
Engaging in such activities will greatlyincrease the risk of a collision that maycause personal injury or death.
Anticipate the need for such activitiesand perform them before you startyour trip when possible, or while yourvehicle is safely at a stop.
ABOUT BODY KITS*
If your vehicle is equipped with a body kitadditional care must be taken to avoiddamage as they are fitted around the loweredges of the vehicle.
Before driving in your vehicle, please readthe following precautions.
• When using towing equipment addi-tional care must be taken to avoid dam-aging the body kit.
• When being towed with the front wheelselevated, the rear ground clearanceshould always be checked.
• Extra attention must be paid to the lowlevel of ground clearance when driving,in particular with sleeping policeman,kerb stones, parking ramps, etc.
• When the vehicle is raised for mainte-nance using a vehicle hoist, additionalequipment maybe required to preventdamage to the body kit.
• Flat-bed equipment is the best methodof towing the vehicle to be equippedwith body kit to avoid any damages.
DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE 3–5
Do not use methanol
Fuels containing methanol should not beused in your vehicle.
This type of fuel can reduce vehicle perfor-mance and damage components of the fuelsystem.
CAUTION
Use of methanol may damage the fuelsystem. Such misuse is not covered by thevehicle warranty.
Operation in foreign countries
If you are going to drive your vehicle in an-other country:
• Observe all regulations regarding regis-tration and insurance.
• Confirm that suitable fuel is available.
CAUTION
If you use inappropriate grade fuel or putincorrect fuel additives into the fuel tank,the engine and catalytic converter mayseriously be damaged.
CAUTION
Be sure to use the correct fuel (petrol ordiesel) corresponding to your vehiclewhen refuelling.
If you fill petrol in your diesel enginedvehicle, your vehicle can be seriouslydamaged.
If you vehicle has diesel engine. you canconfirm the correct fuel by taking a lookat information on the fuel filler cap.
FUEL FOR DIESEL ENGINE
Diesel engine must be operated only oncommercially available diesel fuel meetingthe specifications of DIN EN 590. Do notuse marine diesel oils, heating oils or en-tirely or partially plant-based diesel fuels,such as rape seed oil or bio diesel, Aquazoleand similar diesel-water emulsions.
The flow and filterability of diesel fuel aretemperature-dependent.
Diesel fuels with improved low-temperatureproperties are therefore available on themarket during the winter months. Makesure that you fill the tank with winter fuelbefore the start of the cold weather season.
3–6 DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION
Avoid spilling gasoline on the paintedsurfaces of your car.
• If you spill gasoline on your vehicle,rinse the area with clean, cold wateras soon as possible.
Gasoline can damage the paint.
N5W3001A
WARNING
Fuel vapour is highly flammable.
• Keep flames, sparks and other smok-ing materials away from gasoline.
• Turn off your engine.You can be seriously burned and yourvehicle damaged when gasoline vapourcatches fire.
5. After refuelling, replace cap. Turn itclockwise until you hear several clicks.
6. Push the fuel filler door closed until itlatches.
CloseOpen
NOTE
If, in cold weather, the fuel filler doordoes not open, tap the door lightly. Thentry to open it again.
FILLING THE FUEL TANK
1. Stop the engine.
2. Pull up on fuel filler door release leverlocated on the floor, right front side ofdriver’s seat.
3. Turn the fuel filler cap counterclockwiseslowly. If a hissing sound is heard, waitfor it to stop before completely unscrew-ing the cap. The fuel filler door is in theright rear quarter panel.
4. Remove the cap. The cap is tethered tothe vehicle. Place the cap in its holder onthe inside of the fuel filler door.
N4G3061P
DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE 3–7
WARNING
For safety reasons, fuel containers,pumps and hoses must be properlyearthed. Static electricity build up canignite the gasoline vapour. You can beburnt and your vapour damaged.
Always observe the following precau-tions:
• Use earthed pumps with integrallyearthed hoses and containers whenfilling the fuel tank.
• Do not fill your container when it isinside your vehicle rather than on theground.
• Make sure the nozzle is in contactwith the inside of the fuel filler neckbefore you operate the nozzle. Keepthe nozzle inserted until you finishfilling the tank.
• Keep flames, sparks and smokingmaterials away from gasoline.
Fuel filling from drums or portablecontainers
ADJUSTING THE MIRRORSOUTSIDE REARVIEW MIRRORS
Adjust the outside rearview mirrors so youcan see each side of your vehicle, as well aseach side of the road behind you.
You may adjust the outside rearview mir-ror up or down and left or right using theadjusting levers on each door trim.
The outside mirrors on the both sides areconvex and are labelled with a notice thatreads as follows:
OBJECTS IN MIRROR ARECLOSER THAN THEY APPEAR.
N4G3071P
WARNING
• Always keep your mirrors properlyadjusted, and use them while drivingto increase your visibility of objectsand other vehicles around you.
Failure to properly judge distances be-tween your vehicle and other objectsmay result in a collision causing dam-age to your vehicle or other property,or injuries.
Use the outside mirror on the both sidesto get a wider view of the road behind yourvehicle.
Use the inside mirror to determine the sizeand the distance of objects reflected in theside mirror.
Using only the convex door mirrors cancause you to misjudge size and distancebehind you.
3–8 DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE
POWER OUTSIDE REARVIEW MIRRORS *
You may adjust the outside rearview mir-rors up or down and left or right using themirror switch located on the driver’s sidedoor trim. The ignition switch must be ONto adjust the mirrors.
1. Select the mirror you want to adjust bymoving the selector switch to “L” for LHmirror to “R” for RH mirror.
2. Adjust the selected mirror up, down, leftor right using the corresponding edgesof the mirror adjusting pad.
N4G3081P
CAUTION
Improper care of your mirrors candamage them.
• Do not scrape ice from the face of themirror.
• If ice or other material restricts move-ment of the mirror, do not force theadjustment.
• Use a deicer spray or a hot air blowerto remove the ice.
Damaged mirrors can restrict your vi-sion, resulting in a possible collision.
You may fold the outside rearview mirrorsflat against the sides of the vehicle by push-ing the mirrors backward against yourvehicle.
WARNING
• Do not drive while either outside rear-view mirror is folded back.
Doing so will cause reduced visibility,which could result in a collision.
N4W3072A
DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE 3–9
ELECTRIC FOLDING MIRROR*
Press the electric folding mirror button tofold the outside rearview mirrors flatagainst the side of the vehicle. The ignitionswitch must be ON to fold the mirrors.
To return the mirrors to their original po-sitions, press the button again.
WARNING• Do not press the electric folding mir-
ror button while the vehicle is mov-ing.
• Do not drive while either outside rear-view mirror is folded back.
Doing so will cause reduced visibility,which could result in a collision.
N4G3082P
WARNING
• Always keep your mirrors properlyadjusted, and use them while drivingto increase your visibility of objectsand other vehicles around you.
Failure to properly judge distances be-tween your vehicle and other objectsmay result in a collision causing dam-age to your vehicle or other property,or injuries.
CAUTION
Improper care of your mirrors candamage them.• Do not scrape ice from the face of the
mirror.• If ice or other material restricts move-
ment of the mirror, do not force theadjustment.
• Use a deicer spray or a hot air blowerto remove the ice.
Damaged mirrors can restrict your vi-sion, resulting in a possible collision.
N4G3091P
INSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR
The inside rearview mirror adjusts manu-ally up, or down and left, or right.
Use the inside rearview mirror adjustinglever to modify the mirror for day / nightvision.
This reduces glare from headlights onvehicles behind you.
NIGHT DAY
Adjusting lever
3–10 DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE
To adjust the steering wheel position:
1. Push the lever under the steering columntoward instrument panel.
2. Pull the lever to lock the steering wheelwhen it reaches desired position.
3. Make sure the steering wheel is securelyfixed.
CAUTION
• Do not drive with steering wheel in thehighest position.
Use this position only to make it easierto exit and enter the vehicle.
N4G3101P
ADJUSTING THE STEERINGWHEEL WARNING
Your view through the mirror may losesome clarity when it is adjusted for nightvision.
• Take special care with using your in-side rearview mirror when it is ad-justed for night vision.
Failure to ensure a clear rear view whiledriving may result in a collision causingdamage to your vehicle or other prop-erty, and/or personal injury.
WARNING
The driver must maintain total controlof the steering wheel while the vehicle ismoving.
• Do not adjust the steering wheel po-sition while the vehicle is moving.
Adjusting the steering wheel while driv-ing may result in loss of control of thevehicle.
Adjust steering wheel only when vehicle isstationary and steering column lock is re-leased.
You may adjust the steering wheel using thelever under the steering column.
DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE 3–11
IGNITION SWITCHThe ignition switch, located on the rightside of the steering column, has the follow-ing positions: LOCK, ACC, ON andSTART.
• LOCK
To lock the steering wheel, remove the keyand rotate the steering wheel until it locks.
For easier key operation when unlockingthe steering wheel, move the steering wheelgently from right to left and turn the keyto the ACC position.
N4W3121A
SPEED SENSITIVE POWERSTEERING SYSTEM*The speed sensitive power steering(SSPS)system varies the driver effort required tosteer as the vehicle speed changes.
At low speeds, the system provides maxi-mum power assist for easy turning andparking manoeuvres. At higher speeds, thesteering power is reduced to provide thedriver with firmer steering and directionalstability.
The SSPS system accomplishes this by re-ducing the amount of the power steeringfluid flow from the power steering pumpto the power steering gear as the vehiclespeed increases. When the vehicle is station-ary, the SSPS system provides maximumfluid flow to the steering gear. As the ve-hicle speed increases, the fluid flow to thesteering gear is decreased.
If the system fails, the steering effort willincrease at lower speeds and SSPS warninglamp will illuminate.
See “SSPS WARNING LAMP” in theindex.
• ACC
The engine can be turned off without lock-ing the steering wheel by turning the key tothe ACC position. To turn the key fromACC to LOCK position, push in the keyslightly and turn to LOCK.
Some electrical accessories, such as the ra-dio and the cigarette lighter, can be oper-ated in the ACC position.
CAUTION
• Do not leave the key in the ACC forextended periods.
This will discharge the battery.
• ON
Activates the ignition system and the elec-trical accessories.
CAUTION
• Do not leave the key in the ON forextended periods while the engine isnot running.
This will discharge the battery.
3–12 DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE
STARTING THE ENGINEBEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE
• Make sure the area around vehicle isclear.
• Make sure all windows and lights areclear.
• Inspect tyres for condition, proper infla-tion pressure and foreign objects.
• Adjust seat positions and head restraints.
• Adjust inside and outside mirrors.
• Fasten safety belt and ask all passengersto do the same.
• Check the operation of warning lightsand indicators in the instrument panelwhen the key is turned to ON position.
• Periodically, such as when refueling,check maintenance items noted in thismanual.
WARNING
• Do not turn the key to OFF whiledriving.
Driver could lose control of vehicle andbrake power assistance would be can-celled, causing vehicle damage, personalinjury or possibly death.
WARNING
• Do not reach for the key through thesteering wheel.
Steering wheel can suddenly turn caus-ing driver to lose control of vehicle andcausing injury to fingers, hands or arms.
• START
Starts the engine. When the engine starts,release the key, and it will automaticallyreturn to ON.
Make sure that the engine is not runningbefore turning the key to START.
IMMOBILISER SYSTEM
The immobiliser system provides an addi-tional theft deterrent to the vehicle in whichit is installed and prevents it from beingstarted by unauthorised persons.
The valid key for a vehicle equipped withan immobiliser system is a mechanical igni-tion key with integrated transponder, whichis electronically coded. The transponder isplaced invisibly in the ignition key.Only valid ignition keys can be used to startthe engine. Invalid keys may only open thedoors. The immobiliser system isolates thepower supply to the ignition system, fuelpump and fuel injectors.The engine is automatically immobilisedafter the key is turned to LOCK and hasbeen removed from the ignition switch.
See “KEYS” in the index.If the immobiliser system does not recognisethe electronic code when you turn the igni-tion key to START, the engine will not startand the security indicator on the driver’sdoor lock button will stay on or blink.
DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE 3–13
MANUAL TRANSAXLE
1. Make sure the driver and passengers arewearing their safety belts properly.
2. Apply handbrake if it is not engaged.
3. Make sure the seats, head restraints, andmirrors are in their proper positions andadjust them if it is required.
4. Make sure the gearshift lever is in NEU-TRAL position and press the clutchpedal all the way down.
CAUTION
• Do not operate starter motor for morethan 15 seconds at a time.
• If the engine does not start, wait10 seconds before trying again.
This will prevent starter motor damage.
CAUTION
• Do not idle the engine at high speedover 5 minutes.
Excessive temperature can damage theexhaust system.
NOTE
If the engine has become flooded duringstarting, slowly press the acceleratorpedal all the way down, hold it in thatposition, and start the engine.
N4G3141P
NEUTRAL
Starting the diesel engine
Insert the ignition key into the key cylinderand turn it to the “ON” position withoutdepressing the accelerator pedal. The glowplug indicator ( ) will come on and goout when the glow plugs are sufficientlyheated for cold engine starting. As soon asthe glow plug indicator goes out, start theengine.
(Gasoline)
3–14 DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE
N7W3022PN7W3021P
5. Without touching the accelerator pedal,turn the ignition to START and releaseit when the engine starts. If the enginestarts momentarily but fails to run, waitfor 10 seconds, then try again.
6. Allow the engine to idle at least 30 sec-onds.
7. Release the handbrake.
8. Drive at a moderate speed for a shortdistance, especially in cold weather untilnormal engine operating temperature isreached.
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE*
1. Make sure the driver and passengers arewearing their safety belts properly.
2. Apply the handbrake if it is not engaged.
3. Make sure the seats, head restraints, andmirrors are in their proper positions andadjust them if it is required.
4. Make sure the selector lever is in park(P) position.
5. Without touching the accelerator pedal,turn the ignition key to START and re-lease it when the engine starts. If theengine starts momentarily but fails torun, wait for 10 seconds, then try again.
6. Allow engine to idle at least 30 seconds.
7. Release the handbrake.
8. Drive at a moderate speed of for a shortdistance, especially in cold weather untilnormal engine operating temperature isreached.
NOTE
The engine can only be started when theselector lever is in “P” or “N”.
N4G3151Q
P
Neutral
(Diesel) (Gasoline) (Diesel)
DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE 3–15
N7W3023P
WARNING
Although the engine can be startedwhen the selector lever is in “N” posi-tion, use it only when normal startingis impossible.
See “AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLEEMERGENCY SHIFTING PROCE-DURE” in the index for more informa-tion.
DRIVING YOUR VEHICLEMANUAL TRANSAXLE
To change gears, fully depress the clutchpedal, move the gearshift lever into gear,and slowly release the clutch.
(Gasoline Only)To shift into reverse, you must stop yourvehicle first, reach down the shifter belowthe shift knob, and pull gently up on thereverse lock-out collar while moving theshift lever into the reverse position.
N4G3161P(Gasoline)
CAUTION
• Before shifting between forward andreverse gears, bring the vehicle to acomplete stop.
Shifting between forward and reversegear while the vehicle is moving can dam-age the transaxle.
CAUTION
• Do not rest your foot on the clutchpedal while driving.
This will cause accelerated wear onclutch components.
(Diesel)
3–16 DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE
N7W3024P
3. Insert the ignition key into Brake-Transaxle Shift Interlock slot.
4. Shift to neutral (N).
5. Remove the key from the brake-transaxle shift interlock slot.
6. Start the engine and shift into the gearyou want.
7. Have your vehicle repaired as soon aspossible.
N4G3171Q
P N
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE*
The automatic transaxle in your venicle isan electronically controlled four-speed(Gasoline) or five-speed (Diesel) transaxle.Fourth (Gasoline) or Fifth (Diesel) gear isoverdrive.
Shifting out of park (P)
Your vehicle has a Brake-Transaxle ShiftInterlock (BTSI) system. Before shiftingfrom park (P), the ignition must be ON andyou must depress the brake pedal all theway down. If you cannot shift out of Pwith the ignition ON and the brake pedaldepressed:
1. Turn the ignition off and remove the key.
2. Depress and hold the brake pedal.
(Gasoline) (Diesel)
CAUTION
The auto transmission changes of newvehicle is not smooth initially. It's not afailure in auto transmission but just autotransmission is not settled mechanically.As do more changes, it will have moresmooth change feelings because the au-tomatic transaxle control system per-forms adaption functions.
DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE 3–17
WARNING
To help prevent damage to thetransaxle, observe the following precau-tions:
• Do not press the accelerator pedalwhile shifting from P or N to driveranges. To do so may not only dam-age the transaxle, but could causeyou to lose control of the vehicle.
• Use D4 or D as much as possible.• Never shift to P or R while the ve-
hicle is in motion.• When stopping the vehicle on an up-
hill grade, do not hold the vehicle inplace by pressing the acceleratorpedal. Use the foot brake.
• Press the brake pedal when shiftingfrom P or N to R or a forward gear.
Otherwise transaxle could be damagedor vehicle could move unexpectedly,causing driver to lose control of the ve-hicle, resulting in personal injury ordamage to the vehicle or other property.
: Push the selector lever to the passen-ger side while shifting.
: Press down and hold the selector le-ver and push it to the passenger sidewhile shifting.
: Shift freely.
(1.8 DOHC Gasoline)S3W3172Q
Shifting between gear positions
Movement between certain gear positionsrequires pushing the selector lever to thepassenger side while shifting.
This prevents you from changing selectpositions unexpectedly by blocking thestraight movement of the selector lever whenthe vehicle is moving.
Follow the descriptions as indicated by theblack and/or white arrows when shifting theselector lever.
: Depress the brake pedal and push theselector lever to the passenger sidewhile shifting.
(1.6 DOHC Gasoline)
3–18 DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE
N7W3025P
CAUTION
• Do not use the P (Park) position inplace of the handbrake.
• Turn off the engine, apply thehandbrake, and remove the ignitionkey when leaving the vehicle.
• Never leave the vehicle unattendedwhile the engine is running.
Selector lever positions P, R and N• P (PARK):
Locks the front wheels. Select P onlywhen the vehicle is stationary and thehandbrake is applied.
• R (REVERSE):Select R only when the vehicle is station-ary.
• N (NEUTRAL):Neutral gear position.
(2.0 SOHC Diesel)
Drive ranges D, 4, 3, 2 and 1
• D4 or D:
This drive position is for all normal driv-ing conditions. Allows the transaxle toshift into all four (Gasoline) or five (Die-sel) forward gears. Fourth (Gasoline) orFifth (Diesel) gear is overdrive whichreduces engine speed and noise levelwhile increasing fuel economy.
• 4 (2.0 SOHC Diesel model only):Allow the transaxle to shift into the firstfour gears but not into overdrive. Younight choose 4 instead of D when driv-ing on hilly or mountainous roads,heavy, slow city traffic or descendingsteep hills.
• 3 (1.8 DOHC Gasoline model only):Allows the transaxle to shift into the firstthree gears but not into overdrive. Youmight choose 3 instead of D when driv-ing on hilly or mountainous roads,heavy, slow city traffic or descendingsteep hills.
DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE 3–19
N7W3026P
N4G3173Q
R D 3 2 1
(1.8 DOHC Gasoline)
3. Slowly press the accelerator pedal to setthe vehicle in motion.
Starting the vehicle
1. After warming up the engine, continueto press the brake pedal while shiftingthe selector lever to either of the driveranges.
CAUTION
• Do not shift between D4 or D (Drive)and R (Reverse) or P (Park) while thevehicle is moving.
This will cause damage to your transaxleand personal injury.
2. Release the handbrake and the brakepedal.
• 2:
Allows the transaxle to shift from 1st to2nd gear and prevents automatic shift-ing into 3rd or 4th gear.
Select drive range 2 for more powerwhen climing hills and for engine brak-ing when driving down steep hills.
• 1 (1.6/1.8 DOHC Gasoline model only):
This position locks the transaxle in firstgear.
Select 1 for maximum engine brakingwhen driving down servere grades.
(1.6 DOHC Gasoline) (2.0 SOHC Diesel)
3–20 DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE
Hold mode (Gasoline only)
The hold mode switch lets you keep thetransaxle at a specific gear range and drivethe automatic transaxle like a manualtransaxle.
To activate hold mode, push the hold modeswitch on the console. The HOLD modeindicator will illuminate on the instrumentpanel. See “HOLD MODE INDICATOR”in the index.
Push again to return to normal mode. In-dicator will go off.
N4G3174Q
HOLD
(1.6 DOHC model)
Selector lever position Gear range
D4 3rd
2 2nd
1 1st
In the event of starting difficulties on slip-pery roads, select HOLD and D4 position.The vehicle will start off in third gear,greatly reducing slipping and lose of trac-tion.
To return to normal mode, push the switchagain.
(Gasoline)
(1.8 DOHC model)
Selector lever position Gear range
D 2rd↔3rd↔4th(mainly 4th gear)
3 2rd↔3rd(mainly 3rd gear)
2 2nd (fixed)
1 1st (fixed)
In the event of starting difficulties on slip-pery roads, select HOLD and D position.The vehicle will start off in second gear,greatly reducing slipping and lose of trac-tion.
To return to normal mode, push the switchagain.
DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE 3–21
N7W3027P
If the MIL indicator stays on after startingthe engine and the transaxle cannot beshifted, use this procedure:
1. Turn ignition OFF.
2. Remove key from the ignition.
3. Insert the key gently into the shift lockrelease slot on the centre console to thefront of the shift position indicator.
4. Shift the transaxle to NEUTRAL.
5. Replace the key in the ignition and startthe engine.
6. Move the selector lever to the desiredposition and drive to a workshop tohave your vehicle checked and repaired.We recommend that you consult yourauthorised Chevrolet repairer.
Automatic transaxle emergency shiftingprocedure
If a fault has occurred in the automatictransaxle, the Malfunction Indicator Lamp(MIL) can be turned on. See “MALFUNC-TION INDICATOR LAMP” in the index.
In this situation, automatic shifting can becancelled or shifting may be much harsherthan normal.
You should consult a workshop soon aspossible when this condition occurs. Werecommend your authorised Chevrolet re-pairer.
A serious fault in the automatic transaxlecould prevent it from shifting.
Winter mode (Diesel only)
Use the winter mode in the event of start-ing-off or driving difficulties on icy and slip-pery road. This mode will reduce slippingand loss of traction.
To activate the winter mode, push the win-ter mode switch on the console. The vehiclewill start off in third gear. The winter modeindicator will illuminate on the instrumentpanel. See “WINTER MODE INDICA-TOR” in the index.
To return to normal mode, push the switchagain. Indicator will go off.
(Diesel)
3–22 DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE
WET BRAKES
Driving through water or washing your carcan get the brake components wet.
To restore normal braking:
1. Check behind you for other vehicles.
2. Keep a safe forward speed with plentyof space to your rear and sides.
3. Gently apply brakes until normal perfor-mance is restored.
OVERHEATED BRAKES
Braking excessively when going down along, steep hill can temporarily overheat thebrakes. Shift to a lower gear when goingdown hills. Do not continuously apply thebrakes.
See “ENGINE BRAKING” later in this sec-tion or in the index.
CAUTION
• Do not drive with your foot restingon the brake pedal.
Doing so will accelerate wear to brakecomponents. The brakes may also be-come overheated, resulting in longerbraking distance and an unsafe condi-tion.
WARNING
If the brake pedal can be pressed fur-ther than normal, the brakes may be inneed of repair.
• Consult a workshop immediately. Werecommend your authorisedChevrolet repairer.
WARNING
If one of circuit fails, the brake pedalmust be pressed with greater pedal pres-sure and the braking distance is in-creased.
• Have the brake system checked andrepaired by a workshop immediately.We recommend your authorisedChevrolet repairer.
BRAKESThe braking system is designed for brak-ing performance under a wide range ofdriving conditions.
Your vehicle is equipped with front and reardisc brakes and a dual circuit braking sys-tem.
If one brake circuit should fail, the vehiclecan still be stopped with the remaining cir-cuit, however, stopping distance will be in-creased and more brake pedal pressure willbe required.
DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE 3–23
WARNING
After driving through deep water, wash-ing the vehicle, or using the brakes ex-cessively when going down a steep hill,the brakes can temporarily lose theirstopping power. This may be due to wetbrake components or overheating.
If your brakes temporarily lose theirstopping power because of overheating:
• Shift to a lower gear when goingdown hills. Do not continuously ap-ply the brakes. See “ENGINE BRAK-ING” in the index.
If your brakes temporarily lose theirpower because of wet brake compo-nents, the following procedure will helprestore their normal performance:
1. Check behind you for other vehicles.2. Keep a safe forward speed with plenty
of space to your rear and sides.3. Gently apply the brakes until normal
performance is restored.
N4G3211P
(2)(1)
(3)
HANDBRAKE
The handbrake acts on the rear wheels.
The handbrake lever is located between thefront seats.
To set the handbrake, stop the vehicle, pressthe brake pedal and pull the lever up firmly.
To release the handbrake, press the brakepedal and;
1. Pull the lever up slightly.
2. Push the button on the tip of the lever.
3. Lower the lever while holding the but-ton in.
BRAKE PAD WEAR INDICATOR
The disc brake pads have built-in wear in-dicators which make a high-pitched squeal-ing or screeching noise when the brakepads are worn to the point requiring newpads.
If you hear this noise while driving, havethe brake pads checked and replaced im-mediately by a workshop. We recommendyour authorised Chevrolet repairer.
WARNING
• When brake noise is heard, do notcontinue to drive your vehicle.
This may indicate the brake pads needto be repaired or replaced. Driving withworn brake pads could result in a colli-sion and personal injury.
3–24 DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)
The anti-lock brake system is an advancedelectronic braking system that will help pre-vent skidding and loss of control of yourvehicle. The system allows you to steeraround obstacles while braking hard, andprovides maximum stopping ability on slip-pery pavement.
When the ignition is turned on, the “ABS”warning lamp will glow for about 3 sec-onds. If the light does not go out, or if itcomes on while driving, there is somethingwrong with the ABS. Consult a workshopimmediately. We recommend yourauthorised Chevrolet repairer. See “ABSWARNING LAMP” in the index.
ABS works by sensing the speed of eachwheel during braking. If one of the wheelsis about to stop rolling, the computer willwork the brakes separately at each frontwheel and at the rear wheels. A slight vi-bration in the brake pedal, accompanied bysome noise, usually takes place while theABS is working.
Winter parking tip
Under cold weather conditions, thehandbrake can freeze in the engaged posi-tion. This is most likely to happen if thebrakes are wet.
If there is a risk that handbrake may freezeafter driving through water deep enough towet brake components or having the ve-hicle washed:
1. Apply the handbrake only temporarilywhile you put the gear selector lever in“P” (for automatic transaxle) or in firstor reverse gear (for manual transaxle).
2. Block the rear wheels with wedge blocks.
3. Then release the handbrake.
WARNING
• Do not use handbrake while the ve-hicle is in motion, or as a substitutefor the brake pedal.
Doing so may cause you to lose controlof the vehicle, resulting in a collision,property damage and personal injury.
CAUTION
• Do not drive with the handbrake on.This can cause your rear brakes to over-heat or wear out prematurely. You mayhave to replace them, and you coulddamage other parts of your vehicle.
WARNING
If the handbrake is not set properly, thevehicle may move suddenly. See a work-shop if an adjustment is required. Werecommend your authorised Chevroletrepairer.
CAUTION
• Do not park or operate your vehicleover combustible materials.
They could touch hot exhaust parts un-der your vehicle and ignite.
DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE 3–25
WARNING
If the brake system and the ABS warn-ing lamp come on at the same time,there is a failure in the brake system.
• Have the system checked by a work-shop immediately. We recommendyour authorised Chevrolet repairer.
Braking with ABS
Regardless of the road conditions, do notpump the brakes. Firmly press and holdthe pedal and let the ABS work for you.
NOTE
ABS does not change the time you needto apply the brakes, and it does not al-ways decrease stopping distances.
• Always leave enough room to stop,even though you have ABS.
• Do not intentionally risk yourself driv-ing hazardously.
Tyres and ABS/TCS
Tyre size is important for proper perfor-mance of the ABS/TCS. Replacement tyresshould be the same size, load range andconstruction as the original tyres. Replacetyres in axle sets and only with tyres of thesame tyre performance criteria (TPC) speci-fication number. The use of any size or typeof tyre may seriously affect the ABS/TCSoperation.
TRACTION CONTROL SYSTEM*The traction control system (TCS) is anadvanced system that will help you main-tain traction on slippery roads.
When one of the drive wheels is on solidground and the other is on a slippery sur-face, the wheel on the slippery surface willspin without moving the vehicle.
The TCS can help you avoid such condi-tions by alternately locking and releasingthe front wheels.
When the ignition is switched ON, the TCSwarning lamp comes on with the ABS warn-ing lamp, and goes off after about 3 sec-onds.
If there is a problem with the traction con-trol system, the TCS warning lamp willcome on. If this condition occurs, consulta workshop as soon as possible. We rec-ommend your authorised Chevrolet re-pairer. See “TRACTION CONTROL SYS-TEM WARNING LAMP” in the index.
3–26 DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE
TURBOCHARGER SYSTEM*(Diesel only)Turbochargers help the engine operatemore smoothly and with greater efficiency.
The turbocharger consists of two turboelements, a turbine and a compressor, bothof which are driven from the main centreshaft. The turbine uses the energy of theexhaust gas to drive the compressor. Thecompressor, in turn, draws in fresh airwhich it supplies to the cylinders in the formof compressed air.
The intercooler cools down the compressedair temperature to increase the enginepower by increasing the air density.
The turbocharger elements rotate very fast.If the oil supply to running parts stops, theturbocharger system may be seriouslydamaged. The owner should be encour-aged to observe the following precautionsto ensure maximum turbocharger servicelife.
• After starting the engine, let it run forabout 1 to 2 minutes with idle speed(Avoid acceleration or driving off thevehicle).
• Do not stop the engine immediately af-ter coming back from the high load driv-ing (such as high speed driving or driv-ing down a long slope). Let the enginerun for about 1 to 2 minutes at idlespeed to cool it down.
• After changing the engine oil and oil fil-ter, start the engine and let it run forabout 1 to 2 minutes with idle speed(Avoid acceleration or driving off thevehicle).
• Operate the engine above idle only afternormal engine oil pressure has been es-tablished. Forcing the turbocharger tooperate before the bearings are ad-equately lubricated creates unnecessaryfriction.
• Use only the specified engine oil and ob-serve inspection and replacement inter-vals.
• At low ambient temperature, or whenthe vehicle has not been used for a longperiod, normal engine oil pressure andflow is affected. Under these conditionsthe engine should be started and allowedto idle for a few minutes before operat-ing at higher rpm.
DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE 3–27
WARNING
• Do not downshift your manualtransaxle by two or more gear posi-tions at a time.
This prevents damage to your transaxleor loss of control and personal injuries.
NOTE
Use of engine compression during longmountainous descents may prolong thelife of your brakes.
ENGINE BRAKING
To help use the braking effect of enginecompression when driving on a long down-hill:
• For automatic transaxle, select the driverange “3”, “2” or “1” if necessary.
Engine braking is the most effective indrive range “1”. If drive range “1” is se-lected at too high speed, the transaxleremains in current gear until the vehicleslows down.
Select drive range “3” or “2” for ordi-nary engine braking effect. For evengreater slowing ability, select “1”
• For manual transaxle, downshift to alower gear in a sequential order.
DRIVING TIPSKICK DOWN (AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE)
For faster acceleration, press the accelera-tor pedal all the way down and hold it. Thetransaxle will shift to a lower gear and youwill have more power. When the desiredspeed is reached, let up on the acceleratorand the transaxle will shift up.
S3W3241A
3–28 DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE
STOPPING THE VEHICLE
For automatic transaxle, the selector levercan be left in the chosen drive range withthe engine running. When stopping on hills,engage the handbrake or press the brakepedal. Do not hold the vehicle in place bypressing the accelerator.
Switch the engine off if stopping for lengthyperiods of time, as in traffic jams or at rail-road crossings.
When you park, place the selector lever inP(A/T) or neutral (M/T), apply thehandbrake, and remove the key from theignition switch.
WARNING
To prevent your parked vehicle frommoving accidentally, do not leave thefront wheels in a straight ahead positionwhen parking on a hill.
• Turn the wheels away from the roadand apply the handbrake if parkingfacing downhill.
• Turn the wheels toward the road andapply the handbrake if parking fac-ing uphill.
PARKING THE VEHICLE
Hold the brake pedal down and firmly ap-ply the handbrake.
For vehicles with a manual transaxle:
1. Parking on level ground, place the gear-shift lever in neutral.
2. On a downhill grade, place the gearshiftlever in reverse.
3. On an uphill grade, place the gearshiftlever in first gear.
For vehicles with an automatic transaxle:
1. Move the selector lever to P.
2. Turn the ignition key to LOCK and re-move the key.
See “HANDBRAKE” in the index.
DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE 3–29
HAZARDOUS DRIVING
When hazardous driving is encountered dueto water, snow, ice, mud, sand, or similarconditions:
• Slow down your vehicle and drive cau-tiously allowing extra distance for brak-ing.
• Avoid sudden manoeuvres when brak-ing, steering or accelerating.
• When braking, press the brake pedalwith a light, up-and-down motion untilthe vehicle is stopped, unless equippedwith ABS. For vehicles equipped withABS, press firmly on the brake pedal andsteer around any hazard.
• If stuck in snow, mud or sand, use sec-ond gear to avoid spinning the frontwheels.
• Use sand, tyre chains, or other non-slipmaterials under the front wheels to pro-vide traction when stuck in ice, snow, ormud. See “ROCKING YOUR VE-HICLE” in the index for more informa-tion.
• Do not rest your foot on the brake pedalwhile driving.
• Adhere to the vehicle maintenance sched-ule in the service guide and specificationsin this manual.
SUGGESTIONS FOR MOREECONOMICAL OPERATION
Fuel economy is dependent largely on yourstyle of driving.How you drive, where you drive and whenyou drive affect how many miles (kilome-ters) you can get from a gallon (litre) of fuel.To obtain maximum fuel economy:• Accelerate slowly• Avoid unnecessary idling.• Keep the engine properly tuned.• Do not race the engine.• Use the air conditioning only when nec-
essary.• Slow down when driving on rough
roads.• Keep the tyres inflated to the recom-
mended pressure.• Maintain a safe distance from other ve-
hicles to avoid a collision in case of sud-den stops. This will also reduce wear onthe brake pads and linings.
• Do not carry unnecessary weight.
3–30 DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE
AQUAPLANING
If your vehicle aquaplanes on a wet road,you cannot control your vehicle becausethere is little or no traction between roadand your tyres.
Aquaplaning may occur depending on theroad conditions, tread and inflation of yourtyres and the speed of your vehicle. It isvery dangerous.
The best way to prevent aquaplaning is tolower the speed of your vehicle and be cau-tious whenever you feel the road is wetenough.
TRAILER TOWINGYour vehicle is designed primarily as a pas-senger vehicle, therefore handling, braking,durability and economy will be affected bytowing a trailer.
Your safety and satisfaction depend uponproper use of correct equipment. Also, youshould avoid overloading and other abu-sive use.
The maximum loaded trailer weight youcan pull with your vehicle depends on yourintended use and what special equipmenthas been installed. Before attempting anytowing, ensure that the correct equipmentis fitted to your vehicle.
Your authorised Chevrolet repairer will helpsupply and install towing equipment to suityour requirements.
DRIVING THROUGH DEEP WATER
When you are about to drive through deepwater, you must check the puddle or stand-ing water is not too deep. If you drive tooquickly through deep water, water can en-ter your engine through the air intake caus-ing severe damage.
CAUTION
Before attempting to drive through deepwater, always observe the following pre-cautions:
• Do not drive through water if thedepth is slightly lower than the under-body of your vehicle.
• Drive as slow as you can in high RPMwith the lowest gear position.
DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE 3–31
N5W3003A
608
7751149.5
GVW (345)CURB WT (444)
N5W3002A
480
480
* Maximum permissible overhang
480
480
N4G3251A
GEOMETRIC LOCATION OF THECOUPLING BALL AND THE FIXINGPOINTS OF THE COUPLING DEVICE.
Saloon models(Unit : mm)
* Maximum permissible overhang
Hatchback models(Unit : mm)
N4G3253A
480
480
403
570878.2
GVW (352)CURB WT (445)
N4G3254AN4G3252A
608
775*1094.7
GVW (363.5)CURB WT (439)
* Maximum permissible overhang
Wagon models(Unit : mm)
3–32 DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE
TRAILER LOADING
To load your trailer properly, you mustknow how to measure gross trailer weightand trailer nose weight. Gross trailer weightis the weight of the trailer plus all cargo init. You can measure gross trailer weight byputting the fully loaded trailer on a vehiclescale.
Trailer nose weight is the downward forceexerted on the hitch by the trailer coupler,with the trailer fully loaded and the cou-pler at its normal towing height. This weightcan be measured using bathroom scales.
The weight of your loaded trailer (grosstrailer weight) should never exceed thespecified values.
The maximum permissible trailer noseweight is 75 kg.
The permissible trailer loads are valid forgradients up to 12%.
When the trailer has been coupled, the per-missible rear axle load for the fully loadedtowing vehicle (including occupants) mustnot be exceeded.
WARNING
The given trailer weights are applicablefor altitudes up to 1,000 m above sealevel.
In higher elevations the engine outputmay drop so that it may not be possiblefor the permissible trailer loads to befully utilized in mountainous territory.
• Above 1,000 m in altitude, maxi-mum permissible trailer loads shouldbe reduced by 10% for every further1,000 m in altitudes.
WARNING
Total gross vehicle weight with trailermust not exceed the Gross VehicleWeight Rating(GVWR) of the vehicle.
The total gross vehicle weight is theweight of the vehicle, driver, passengers,luggage or cargo, plus the weight of thehitch and the trailer nose weight.
Maximum Load Limits (unit: kg)
Caravan/trailer
NoseType
With Brake
Without Brake
With Brake
Without Brake
1,200
610
1,000
610
75
75
75
75
1.4D
1.6D
1.8D
2.0SDiesel
DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE 3–33
TYRES
When towing trailers, be sure your tyres areproperly inflated to the inflation pressureshown on the tyre pressure label in thedriver's door shut.
SAFETY CHAINS
Always attach safety chains between yourvehicle and the trailer. Cross the safetychains under the nose of the trailer so thatthe nose will not drop to the road if it be-comes separated from the hitch. Follow themanufacturer's recommendation for at-taching safety chains. Always leave justenough slack to permit full turning. Neverallow safety chains to drag on the road.
BRAKE FLUID
Change the brake fluid every 10,000 miles(15,000 km) under the following condi-tions.• Towing a trailer frequently.• Driving in hilly or mountainous terrain.
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE FLUID(1.8 DOHC model only)
Change the automatic transaxle fluid every40,000 miles (60,000 km) if your vehicletows trailer frequently.
TOWING TIPS
When towing a trailer, your vehicle willhandle differently than under normal driv-ing conditions.For safety, observe the following precau-tions:• Practice turning, stopping, and reversing
before you begin towing in traffic. Donot tow in traffic until you are confidentthat you can handle the vehicle andtrailer safely.
• Before driving, make sure that the light-ing system of the trailer works properly.
• Do not drive faster than 50 mph(80 km/h) or legal maximum speeds,whichever is lower.
• When driving uphill do not drive fasterthan 19 mph (30 km/h) in first gear or31 mph (50 km/h) in second gear.
WARNING
Incorrect loading and crosswinds, largetrucks passing or rough roads cancause swaying or trailer separation.• Adjust nose load by distribution of
load in trailer.• Check by weighing loaded trailer and
nose load separately.• Check the relevant country or terri-
tory registration authorities for thelegal maximum towing weight capa-cities.
TRAILER BRAKES
If the caravan/trailer brakes are used, youshould follow all instructions provided bythe manufacturer. Never modify the brakesystem of your vehicle.
TRAILER LIGHTS
Make sure your trailer is equipped withlights which meet country and local require-ments. Always check for the proper opera-tion of all trailer lights before you start totow.
3–34 DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE
• Make sure that you have enough roomwhen cornering and avoid suddenmanoeuvres.
• Avoid abrupt starts, acceleration orstops.
• Avoid sharp turns or lane changes.• Always drive your vehicle at a moderate
speed.• Always have someone guide you when
reversing.• Allow adequate stopping distance.
Stopping distance is increased when youtow a trailer.
• Slow down and shift down into a lowergear before descending steep or longdownhill grades.
• Avoid holding the brake pedal down toolong or too frequently, which will causethe brakes to overheat and result in re-duced brake efficiency.
• Always block the wheels on both vehicleand trailer when parking. Apply thehandbrake firmly.
• Parking on a steep slope is not recom-mended.
PARKING ON HILLS
You really should not park your vehicle,with a trailer attached, on a hill. If some-thing goes wrong, your rig could start tomove. People can be injured, and bothyour vehicle and the trailer can be damaged.
But if you ever have to park your rig on ahill, here's how to do it:
1. Apply your foot brakes, but don't shiftinto PARK(P) for a automatic transaxleyet, or into a gear for a manualtransaxle.
2. Have someone place chocks under thetrailer wheels.
3. When the wheel chocks are in place, re-lease the foot brakes until the chocksabsorb the load.
4. Re-apply the foot brakes. Then applyyour handbrake, and then shift toPARK(P) for a automatic transaxle, orFirst or Reverse gear for a manualtransaxle.
5. Release the foot brakes.
You really should not park your vehicle,with a trailer attached, on a hill.
If something goes wrong, such as thetrailer hitch becoming disengaged,people can be injured and both the ve-hicle and trailer can be damaged.
• If someone removing the blocks standsdirectly behind the trailer, they could beinjured. If your brakes or the hitchslipped, the trailer could roll backwards.
Make sure anyone removing blocksfrom your wheels stands to one side.
• Take note of trailer manufacturer's in-structions.
DRIVING ON GRADIENTS
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gearbefore you start down a long or steepdown gradient. If you don't shift down,you might have to use your brakes somuch that they would get hot and no longerwork efficiently.
On a long uphill gradient, shift down andreduce your speed to around 45 mph(70km/h) to reduce the possibility of engineand transaxle overheating.
DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE 3–35
MAINTENANCE WHEN TRAILERTOWING
Your vehicle will need service more oftenwhen you're pulling a trailer. See the main-tenance schedule in the service guide formore information on this. Things that areespecially important in trailer operation areautomatic transaxle fluid (don't overfill),engine oil, belt, cooling system, brake fluidand brake adjustment. Each of these iscovered in this manual and the index willhelp you find them quickly. If you'retrailering, it's a good idea to review thesesections before you start your trip.
Check periodically to see that all hitch nutsand bolts are tight.
WARNING
To protect against CO entering the ve-hicle, inspect the exhaust system andbody according to the following recom-mendations:• At each oil change.• Whenever you notice a change in
sound of exhaust system.• If exhaust system, underbody or rear
of vehicle is damaged or becomes cor-roded.
• Do not run the engine in confined orclosed areas, such as garages. Movevehicle to an open area.
(Continued)
ENGINE EXHAUST(CARBON MONOXIDE)Engine exhaust gases contain carbon mon-oxide (CO) which is colourless andodourless. Prolonged exposure to CO canlead to unconsciousness and death.
Whenever you suspect that exhaust gasesare entering the vehicle, immediately takeyour vehicle to your authorised Chevroletrepairer.
WHEN YOU ARE READY TO LEAVEAFTER PARKING ON A HILL
1. Apply your foot brakes and hold thepedal down while you:
• Start your engine
• Shift into a gear and
• Release the handbrake.
2. Let up on the brake pedal.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear ofthe chocks.
4. Stop and have someone pick up andstore the chocks.
3–36 DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING
(Continued)• Do not sit in parked vehicle with the
engine running for extended periodsof time.
• When vehicle is stopped in an uncon-fined area for any amount of time,put your ventilation in fresh airmode to draw outside air inside. (See“RECIRCULATION” in the index)
• Do not drive with boot lid or tailgateopen. If driving this way is unavoid-able, close windows, put your venti-lation system in fresh air mode andrun the blower at high speed. (See“RECIRCULATION” in the index)
ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTIONTREND-SETTING TECHNOLOGY
When developing and manufacturing yourvehicle, we used environment-friendly andin the main recyclable materials. The pro-duction methods used to make your vehicleare likewise environmentally-compatible.
Recycling of production wastes keeps thecirculation of material closed. Reduction ofenergy and water requirements also helpsto conserve natural resources.
A highly advanced design means that yourvehicle can be easily disassembled at the endof its working life, and the indivadual ma-terials separated for subsequent re-use.
Materials such as asbestos and cadimiumare not used. The refrigerant in the air con-ditioning system* is CFC-free.
END-OF-LIFE VEHICLE RECOVERY
Information on the recycling ofend-of-life vehicles is available athttp://www.chevroleteurope.com
CLIMATE CONTROL AND AUDIO SYSTEM 4–1
CLIMATE CONTROL ANDAUDIO SYSTEM4
• AIR VENTS ............................................................ 4-2
• CONTROL PANEL ................................................. 4-3
• AIR CONDITIONING ............................................ 4-7
• HEATING ............................................................... 4-8
• VENTILATION ....................................................... 4-9
• DEFROSTING AND DEFOGGING ....................... 4-10
• AUXILIARY HEATER ............................................. 4-10
• AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL ..................... 4-11
• OPERATING TIPS FOR VENTILATION SYSTEM .. 4-16
• RDS RADIO, CASSETTE AND CD CHANGER ..... 4-17
• RDS RADIO AND CD.......................................... 4-39
• REMOTE CONTROL SYSTEM ............................. 4-62
4–2 CLIMATE CONTROL AND AUDIO SYSTEM
AIR VENTSSide vents
You can direct air through both adjustableside vents toward either side of the frontpassenger area, or toward the side win-dows.
Windscreen defroster vents
The windscreen defroster vents direct aironto the windscreen.
Centre vents
You can control the direction of airflowthrough both adjustable centre vents.
1. Side vent
2. Windscreen defroster vent
3. Centre vent
4. Floor vent
5. Front door window defrostervent
N4W4012A(side vents)
(centre vents)
Floor vents
The floor vents direct air into the front footarea.
Front door window defroster vents
The front door window defroster ventsdirect air onto the side windows, mainly inthe area near the outside mirror.
Rear vents*
Cooled or heated air travels to the rear footarea through ducts underneath the frontseats.
To shut off the centre vents and the sidevents
Turn the wheel next to each vent outlet allthe way down to block the airflow throughthe vents.
N5W4001P
CLIMATE CONTROL AND AUDIO SYSTEM 4–3
CONTROL PANEL1. Temperature control knob.
2. Fan control knob.
3. Air distribution mode knob.
4. Air conditioning (A/C) button*. See“AIR CONDITIONING” later in thissection.
TEMPERATURE CONTROL KNOB
The temperature control knob controls thetemperature of the air that comes throughthe air vents.
Turn the knob to the blue area to get coolair and to the red area to get warm air.
5. Recirculation button.
6. Rear window and outside mirror de-froster button. See “REAR WINDOWDEFROSTER BUTTON” in the index.
N4W4031BN4G4021Q
4–4 CLIMATE CONTROL AND AUDIO SYSTEM
FAN CONTROL KNOB
You may control the rate of airflow com-ing from the system by turning the fanspeed control knob. Turn the knob clock-wise to increase the fan speed and counter-clockwise to decrease the fan speed.
Adjust the fan control knob from the offposition through to 4 as you wish.
Front ( )
This setting directs air through centre andside vents.
AIR DISTRIBUTION MODE KNOB
Adjust the air distribution knob to thedesired mode which you want to direct theair flow.
The air distribution knob can be set in oneof five positions:
N4W4041A N4W4051A N4G4051Q
CLIMATE CONTROL AND AUDIO SYSTEM 4–5
Bi-level ( )
Directs air in two ways. Half of the airthrough the floor vents and the remainingthrough the centre and side vents.
Floor/Defrost ( )
This mode directs most of the air throughwindshield defroster vents, front door win-dow defroster vents and the floor vents.
A small amount of air is also directed tothe side vents.
Floor ( )
Directs most of the air through the floorvents. Some of the air will also be directedto the windshield defroster vents, side vents,and rear vents (if so equipped). Keep thearea under the front seats clear in order notto block the airflow to the rear compart-ment.
N4G4052Q N4G4053Q N4G4054Q
4–6 CLIMATE CONTROL AND AUDIO SYSTEM
RECIRCULATION MODE BUTTON
Press this button when driving in dustyconditions or to avoid traffic or outsidefumes, and when quick cooling or heatingof the passenger area is required. The indi-cator light will illuminate and interior airwill be recirculated.
Pressing the recirculation mode buttonagain will draw outside air into the passen-ger compartment. The indicator will go out.
Your windows may fog if you use the re-circulation mode for extended periods. Ifthis happens, press the recirculation buttonagain for the outside air mode.
Defrost ( )
Directs most of the air through the wind-shield and front door window defrostervents.
A small amount of air is also directed tothe side vents.
CAUTION
Driving with recirculation mode for pro-longed period of time can make yousleepy.
• Periodically turn to the outside airmode for fresh air.
N4G4055Q N4G4061Q
CLIMATE CONTROL AND AUDIO SYSTEM 4–7
NOTE
You may notice water drip under enginecompartment sometimes after drivingwith A/C on. This is normal becauseyour cooling system removes the mois-ture from the air.
AIR CONDITIONING*The refrigeration unit of the air condition-ing (A/C) system cools and removes mois-ture, dust, and pollen from the air insideyour vehicle.
Even with the A/C on, your vehicle willproduce warm air if you set the tempera-ture control knob to warm.
To turn on the air conditioning (A/C):
1. Start the engine.
2. Press A/C button. (Indicator light willcome on to confirm the A/C is running)
3. Adjust fan speed.
A/C BUTTON
NOTE
Because the compressor of the coolingsystem shares the engine power, you maynotice slight change in engine power andperformance when the compressoroperates.
CAUTION
Using your air conditioning (A/C) sys-tem while driving up long hills or inheavy traffic can cause the engine over-heating. (See “OVERHEATING” in theindex)
• Watch temperature gauge.• Turn OFF the A/C if the gauge indi-
cates engine overheating.Vehicle can be damaged.
NOTE
The air conditioning will not operatewhen the fan control knob is in the offposition.
To turn off the A/C:
Press A/C button again. (Indicator light willgo off to confirm the A/C is not running)
N4G4081Q
4–8 CLIMATE CONTROL AND AUDIO SYSTEM
Normal cooling
1. Turn on the air conditioning (A/C) but-ton. (Indicator illuminates)
2. Press recirculation button. (Indicator il-luminates)
3. Turn the air distribution knob toFRONT ( ) or BI-LEVEL ( ).
4. Turn temperature control knob to bluearea for cooling.
5. Adjust the fan control knob to the de-sired speed.
HEATINGMaximum heating
Use the maximum heating mode for quickheating of the passenger area. Do not useit for lengthy periods because the interiorair may become stale and the windows mayfog. To clear the windows, turn off the re-circulation button to allow fresh air into thevehicle.
For maximum heating:
1. Turn off air conditioning (A/C). (Indi-cator goes off)
2. Press recirculation button. (Indicator il-luminates)
3. Turn air distribution knob to BI-LEVEL( ) or FLOOR ( ).
4. Turn temperature control knob all theway to the red area for heating
5. Turn fan control knob to maximumspeed.
COOLING
Maximum cooling
To achieve maximum cooling during hotweather and when your vehicle has beenexposed to the sun for a long time:
1. Open windows slightly to let warm airescape.
2. Turn air conditioning (A/C) on. (Indica-tor illuminates)
3. Press recirculation button. (Indicator il-luminates)
4. Turn air distribution knob to FRONTmode ( ).
5. Turn temperature control knob all theway to the blue area for cooling.
6. Turn fan control knob to highest speed.
CLIMATE CONTROL AND AUDIO SYSTEM 4–9
VENTILATIONBi-level
Use this setting on cool, but sunny days.Warmer air will flow into the floor area andcool, outside air will flow toward yourupper body.
To use this setting:
1. Turn off recirculation button. (Indicatorgoes off)
2. Turn air distribution knob to BI-LEVEL( ).
3. Adjust temperature control knob to thedesired temperature.
4. Turn fan control knob to the desiredspeed.
Normal heating
1. Turn off air conditioning (A/C). (Indi-cator goes off)
2. Turn off recirculation. (Indicator goesoff)
3. Turn air distribution knob to FLOOR( ) or BI-LEVEL ( ).
4. Turn temperature control knob to redarea for heating.
5. Turn fan control knob to desired speed.
Ventilation
To direct air through the centre and sidevents:
1. Turn off air conditioning (A/C). (Indi-cator goes off)
2. Turn off recirculation. (Indicator goesoff)
3. Turn the air distribution knob toFRONT ( ) or BI-LEVEL ( ).
4. Turn temperature control knob to bluearea for cooling.
5. Turn fan control knob to desired speed.
4–10 CLIMATE CONTROL AND AUDIO SYSTEM
To keep the windscreen clear and directwarm air through floor, turn the air distri-bution knob to FLOOR/DEFROST ( ).
NOTE
Turn on the A/C to improve the effi-ciency of the defroster.
DEFROSTING AND DEFOGGINGYou can operate the defroster mode withthe air conditioning (A/C) system on or off.To defrost the windscreen:
1. Set the recirculation mode to outside airmode (Indicator goes off) and turn theair distribution knob to DEFROST ( ).
2. Turn temperature control knob to redarea for warm air.
3. Adjust the fan control knob to highestspeed for quick defrosting.
CAUTION
The difference between the outside airand the temperature of the windscreencan cause the windows to fog, therebyrestricting your front vision.
• Do not use FLOOR/DEFROST ( )or DEFROST ( ) in extremely hu-mid weather when the temperaturecontrol knob is set to the blue area.
This can lead to an accident which candamage your vehicle and cause personalinjuries.
NOTE
The A/C is automatically turned on insome models to improve the perfor-mance of the defroster when you se-lect DEFROST( ) or FLOOR/DE-FROST ( ) mode.
AUXILIARY HEATER*(Diesel only)This supplementary heater is an electricalair heating type and installed in the air con-ditioner module. This device improves theheating effect by increasing the temperatureof flowing air into the passenger compart-ment.
CLIMATE CONTROL AND AUDIO SYSTEM 4–11
AUTOMATIC CLIMATECONTROL*GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Full automatic temperature control (FATC)system controls the interior temperature inyour vehicle automatically. It will achieve thedesired temperature when you select theAUTO mode.
The desired temperature is controlled by anin-car sensor signal, coolant temperature,sun sensor signal and the ambient temp.sensor signal.
CAUTION
If the temperature indicator flashes for5 seconds at an interval of 0.5 secondsright after starting the engine, climatecontrol has a malfunction.
• Operate your FATC manually andcontact a workshop as soon as pos-sible. We recommend your authorisedChevrolet repairer.
Temperature sensor*
Temperature information sampled fromthe interior of your car is used in establish-ing ventilation system requirements whenoperating in AUTO mode.
Sunlight sensor
Sunlight sensor is located in front of thewindscreen defroster vents.
This sensor detects sunlight when operat-ing in AUTO mode. Do not cover the sen-sor, as this may cause incorrect informationto be displayed. CAUTION
Do not place stickers over the tempera-ture sensor as this will impair its function.
N4W4131A N4G4131P
4–12 CLIMATE CONTROL AND AUDIO SYSTEM
DISPLAY PANEL
1.Selected temperature 2.Defroster indicator 3.Air distribution mode indicator 4.Air conditioning indicator 5.Outside temperature display mode indi-
cator
6.Auto mode indicator 7.Outside air mode indicator 8.Recirculation mode indicator 9.Fan operation indicator10.Fan speed indicator
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL
When you operate your FATC in AUTOmode, the only thing you have to do is justset the desired temperature to your prefer-ence.
AUTO buttonWhen the AUTO button is pressed, theinterior temperature will be controlled au-tomatically to reach the desired preset tem-perature. The system will control air distri-bution mode, fan speed, air conditioningand recirculation functions automatically.
AUTO mode indicator will appear in thedisplay panel.
N4W4151A
CLIMATE CONTROL AND AUDIO SYSTEM 4–13
To set the desired temperature
Rotate the temperature control knob untilthe desired temperature is displayed.
Clockwise : The desired temperature willincrease by 0.5°C (1°F).
Counterclockwise : The desired temperaturewill decrease by 0.5°C (1°F).
You can set the desired temperature at yourpreference between 18°C and 32°C.
NOTE
When desired temperature is set at either“HI” (maximum) or “Lo” (minimum),the fan operates continuously at highestspeed even after the interior temperaturereaches the preset temperature.
To turn off the system, press the OFF but-ton.
MANUAL CONTROL
A/C button
Turns the air conditioning on or off.AUTO mode is cancelled and indicator willgo off when this button is pressed.
The A/C indicator ( ) will illuminate whenthe air conditioning is on.
Press the A/C button again to turn theA/C off, or press the OFF button to turnthe entire system off.
Refer to “A/C BUTTON” earlier in thissection.
N4W4152A N4W4153A N4W4161A
J221_04_EN-R.pmd 2007-02-15, 13:5713
4–14 CLIMATE CONTROL AND AUDIO SYSTEM
Recirculation mode button
Selects either outside air or recirculated in-side air.
Refer to “RECIRCULATION MODEBUTTON” earlier in this section.
Air distribution mode change
If the MODE button is pressed, AUTOmode is cancelled and the air distributionmode will be changed in the following se-quence.
FRONT( )→BI-LEVEL( )→FLOOR( )→FLOOR/DEFROST( )
Refer to “AIR DISTRIBUTION MODEKNOB” earlier in this section for more in-formation.
N4W4162A N4W4163A
Fan speed control knob
Adjust the fan speed by rotating this knob.
AUTO mode is cancelled when this knobis rotated.
N4W4164A
CLIMATE CONTROL AND AUDIO SYSTEM 4–15
DEFROSTING
Press the DEFROST button ( ) to defrostthe windscreen.
Recirculation mode is changed to outsideair and air conditioning is turned on. Airconditioning can be switched off by press-ing the A/C button without cancelling thedefrosting mode.
Adjust the fan speed using fan speed con-trol knob.
This mode can be cancelled by pressing thedefrost button again, A/C button, air dis-tribution mode button or AUTO button.
Refer to “DEFROSTING AND DEFOG-GING” earlier in this section.
OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE DISPLAY
To display the outside temperature, pressthe temperature control knob. The outsidetemperature display mode indicator will bedisplayed.
Pressing the temperature control knobagain will cancel the outside temperaturedisplay mode, otherwise the display willreturn to selected temperature automaticallyin about 5 seconds.
The temperature sensor is located in thefront bumper area.
Due to its location, the displayed tempera-ture can be affected by road or engine heatwhile slow driving or idling.
For that reason, the most accurate outsidetemperature can be monitored when thevehicle speed is faster than 40 km/h(25 mph).
N4W4171A N4W4181A
4–16 CLIMATE CONTROL AND AUDIO SYSTEM
OPERATING TIPS FORVENTILATION SYSTEMIf your vehicle has been parked in directsunlight, open the windows before turningon the air conditioning (A/C).
To clear foggy windows on rainy days orin high humidity, decrease the humidityusing the A/C.
Turn on the A/C system for a few minutesat least once a week, even in winter or whenthe A/C system is not being used regularly.This maintains correct lubrication of thecompressor and the seals and will prolongthe service life of the system.
Driving in stop-and-go traffic may reducethe effectiveness of the A/C system.
The A/C compressor does not operatewhen the fan control knob is turned off.
If your vehicle is equipped with air condi-tioner filter, proper maintenance is required.See “AIR CONDITIONER FILTER” in theindex. This filter removes dust, pollen andother airborne irritants from the outside airwhich is drawn into your vehicle.
TEMPERATURE DEGREE CHANGE
To change the display from ’C to ’F , pressthe MODE switch three times within 3 sec-onds while pushing the AUTO switch af-ter setting the temperature to 26°C or 79°F.
CLIMATE CONTROL AND AUDIO SYSTEM 4–17
WARNING
Road safety has absolute priority. Onlyoperate your car radio if the road andtraffic conditions allow you to do so.Familiarise yourself with the unit beforesetting off on your journey.
When inside your vehicle, you shouldalways be able hear police, fire fighterand ambulance sirens in time. For thisreason, set the volume of whatever youare listening to to a reasonable level.
WARNING
The audio system can be damagedwhen starting the vehicle with jump leads.Switch the system off.
RDS RADIO, CASSETTE ANDCD CHANGERBefore using the device for the first time,please read these instructions carefully.
CONTROLS
AUTO REVERSEHI-POWER 40Wx4CH
4–18 CLIMATE CONTROL AND AUDIO SYSTEM
1. Volume control, to switch the unit on/off and operate the mute volume func-tion.
2. button, to unlock the removablecontrol panel (release panel).
3. RDS button, to switch the RDS func-tion on/off (Radio Data System).To display scrolling text.
4. Cassette eject.
5. Cassette compartment.
6. button, to switch the tape side.
7. SRC button, to select the radio, cas-sette and CD changer sources.
8. Arrow buttons.
9. AUDIO button, to adjust the sound(bass and treble) and sound distribu-tion (balance and fader) settings.
10. LD button, to activate the loudnessfunction.
11. MENU button, to open the basic set-tings menu.
12. Keys 1 - 5.
13. TR button (traffic), to switch trafficinformation standby on/off.PTY, to switch the PTY function on/off.
14. AM/FM button (band), to select radiomode, the FM memory levels, and theMW and LW wavebands.
15. SCAN button, to start the scan func-tion.TS, starts the Travelstore function.
16. CD compartments 1 – 5.
17. CD select and eject button.
CLIMATE CONTROL AND AUDIO SYSTEM 4–19
DISPLAYRECEPTION INTERFERENCE
Radio reception is affected by the station'ssignal strength and the distance to the ra-dio station, buildings, bridges, mountains,etc.
Variations in reception quality can becaused by external influences.
9. lo indicator, illuminates when the seektuning sensitivity is set to "lo".
10. PTY indicator, illuminates when PTYis activated.
11. RDS indicator, illuminates when theRDS function is activated.
12. TRAFFIC indicator, illuminates whenradio traffic information is activated.
13. MTL indicator, illuminates when thetape type is set to "Metal".
14. Cassette symbol, illuminates if a cas-sette is in the unit.
1. Waveband and memory level display
2. Main display area
3. Dolby symbol, illuminates when theDolby function is activated.
4. Stereo symbol, illuminates when a sta-tion is received in stereo.
5. SCAN indicator, illuminates when theSCAN function is activated.
6. MIX indicator, illuminates when theMIX function is activated.
7. RPT indicator, illuminates when the re-peat function is activated.
8. LD indicator, illuminates when loud-ness is activated.
S3W4144A
MTL RDS PTY lo LD RPT MIX SCANTRAFFIC
14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5
3 421
4–20 CLIMATE CONTROL AND AUDIO SYSTEM
Switching ON by inserting a cassette:
If the unit is switched off and there is nocassette inserted in the drive,
⇒ Gently insert the cassette with the openside facing towards the right into thedrive until you feel some resistance.
The cassette will be drawn into the driveautomatically. The unit switches on. Cas-sette playback begins.
GENERAL OPERATION
Switching ON/OFF
Switching on/off using the vehicle ignition:If you did not switch the unit off usingbutton (1) and the removable control panelis attached, you can turn the unit on/offsimultaneously with the vehicle ignition.
You can switch the unit on even if the igni-tion is off:
⇒ To do so, press button (1).
NOTE
To protect the vehicle battery, the unitwill switch off automatically after onehour if the ignition is off.
Switching ON/OFF using the detachablecontrol panel:
⇒ Remove the control panel.
The unit switches off.
⇒ Attach the control panel again.
The unit switches on. The settings (radio,cassette or CD changer) that were set be-fore the unit was switched off will be reac-tivated.
Switching ON/OFF using button (1):
⇒ To switch the unit on, press button (1).
⇒ To switch the unit off, press button (1)for longer than two seconds.
NOTE
You must not hinder or assist the driveas it draws in the cassette.
CLIMATE CONTROL AND AUDIO SYSTEM 4–21
Instantaneously reducing the volume(mute)
You can instantaneously reduce the volume(mute) to a level preset by you.
⇒ Briefly press button (1).
"MUTE" appears in the display.
Setting The Mute Level:
You can set the unit's volume mute level.
⇒ Press the MENU button (11).
⇒ Keep pressing the or button (8)until "MUTE LVL" appears in the dis-play.
⇒ Set the mute level using the << or >>button (8).
When you have finished making yourchanges,
⇒ press the MENU button (11) twice.
Adjusting the volumeThe system volume can be adjusted in stepsfrom 0 (off) to 41 (maximum).
To increase the system volume,
⇒ turn the knob/pushbutton (1) in a clock-wise direction.
To decrease the system volume,
⇒ turn the knob/pushbutton (1) in ananticlockwise direction.
Setting the power-on volume:You can set the volume that you want theunit to play at when it is switched on.
⇒ Press the MENU button (11).
⇒ Keep pressing the or button (8)until "ON VOL" appears in the dis-play.
⇒ Set the power-on volume using the <<or >> button (8).
To help you adjust the volume more easily,the volume will be increased / decreased asyou make your changes.
If you change the setting to "0", the power-on volume will be the same as the volumelevel that you heard before the unit was lastswitched off.
When you have finished making yourchanges,
⇒ press the MENU button (11) twice.
NOTE
To protect your hearing, the power-onvolume is limited to a value of "30".If the volume level was higher when theunit was switched off and the power-onvolume was set to "0", the unit willswitch on again with a volume levelof "30".
4–22 CLIMATE CONTROL AND AUDIO SYSTEM
Configuring the confirmation beep
For some functions you will hear a confir-mation beep if you keep a button pressedfor longer than two seconds, e.g. when stor-ing a radio station to a station preset but-ton.
You can switch the confirmation beep on/off.
⇒ Press the MENU button (11).
⇒ Keep pressing the or button (8)until "BEEP OFF" or "BEEP ON" ap-pears in the display.
"BEEP OFF" means that the confirmationbeep is switched off, "BEEP ON" means itis switched on.
⇒ Use the << / >> buttons (8) to switchbetween the settings.
When you have finished making yourchanges,
⇒ press the MENU button (11).
Mute while telephoning
If your unit is connected to a mobile tele-phone, the car radio's volume will be mutedas soon as you "pick up" the telephone.This will only work if the mobile telephoneis connected to the unit correctly.
If a traffic announcement is received dur-ing a telephone call and traffic informationpriority has been activated, the traffic an-nouncement will only be played once thephone call is ended. For further details, readthe chapter entitled "Traffic informationreception".
The volume will be reduced to the set mutevolume level.
Sound and volume distribution settings
You can adjust the sound settings (bass andtreble) separately for each source (radio,cassette and CD changer). The volume dis-tribution settings (fader and balance) ap-ply to all the audio sources.
Adjusting the bass:
To adjust the bass,
⇒ press the AUDIO button (9).
"BASS" appears in the display.
⇒ Press the or button (8) to adjustthe bass.
When you have finished making yourchanges,
⇒ press the AUDIO button (9).
CLIMATE CONTROL AND AUDIO SYSTEM 4–23
Adjusting the left/right volumedistribution (balance):
To adjust the left/right volume distribution(balance),
⇒ press the AUDIO button (9).
"BASS" appears in the display.
⇒ Keep pressing the << or >> button (8)until "BAL" appears in the display.
⇒ Press the or button (8) to adjustthe balance (right/left).
When you have finished making yourchanges,
⇒ press the AUDIO button (9).
Adjusting the treble:
To adjust the treble,
⇒ press the AUDIO button (9).
"BASS" appears in the display.
⇒ Keep pressing the << or >> button (8)until "TREB" appears in the display.
⇒ Press the or button (8) to adjustthe treble.
When you have finished making yourchanges,
⇒ press the AUDIO button (9).
Adjusting the front/back volumedistribution (fader):
To adjust the front/back volume distribu-tion (fader),
⇒ press the AUDIO button (9).
"BASS" appears in the display.
⇒ Keep pressing the << or >> button (8)until "FADER" appears in the display.
⇒ Press the or button (8) to adjustthe fader (front/back).
When you have finished making yourchanges,
⇒ press the AUDIO button (9).
4–24 CLIMATE CONTROL AND AUDIO SYSTEM
• REG: At certain times, some radio sta-tions divide their programme into re-gional programmes providing differentregional content. You can use the REGfunction to prevent the car radio fromswitching to alternative frequencies thatare transmitting different programmecontent.
NOTE
You can adjust the loudness settingsseparately for each audio source (radio,cassette and CD changer).
The loudness boost can be set in steps rang-ing from 1 to 3.
"LOUDNESS OFF" means that the loud-ness feature is switched off.
⇒ Press the LD button (10).
⇒ Keep pressing one of the << / >> or / buttons (8) until the required set-
ting appears in the display.
If you set the loudness boost to a value of1, 2 or 3, the LD indicator appears in thedisplay.
When you have finished making yourchanges,
⇒ press the LD button (10).
RADIO MODE
This unit is equipped with an RDS radioreceiver. Many of the receivable FM stationstransmit a signal that not only carries theprogramme but also additional informa-tion such as the station name andprogramme type (PTY). The station nameappears in the display as soon as it is re-ceived.
Switching to radio modeIf you are in cassette or CD changer mode,
⇒ press the AM/FM button (14)
or
⇒ keep pressing the SRC button (7) untilthe unit switches to radio mode.
"RADIO" appears in the display.
Convenient RDS functions (AF, REG)The convenient RDS functions AF (Alter-native Frequency) and REG (Regional) ex-tend your radio's range of functions.
• AF: If this RDS function is activated, theunit automatically tunes into the bestreceivable frequency for the station thatis currently set.
Loudness
The loudness feature can be used to boostthe bass at low volume levels.
Switching REG ON/OFF:
⇒ Press the MENU button (11).
⇒ Keep pressing the or button (8)until "REG" appears in the display."OFF" or "ON" is displayed alongside"REG".
⇒ To switch REG on/off, press the << or>> button (8).
When you have finished making yourchanges,
⇒ press the MENU button (11).
NOTE
REG must be separately activated/deac-tivated in the menu.
CLIMATE CONTROL AND AUDIO SYSTEM 4–25
Switching The RDS Function ON/OFF:
⇒ To use the RDS functions (AF and REG),press the RDS button (3).
If you activated the RDS function, "RDS"lights up in the display.
Selecting the frequency range / memorylevel
This unit can receive programmes broad-cast over the FM frequency range as wellas the MW and LW (AM) ranges.
There are three preset memory levels for theFM frequency range (FM 1, FM 2 andFMT) and one for each of the MW and LWranges.
You can store five stations on each memorylevel.
To switch between the memory levels orfrequency ranges,
⇒ briefly press the AM/FM button (14)repeatedly until the required frequencyrange / memory level is displayed.
Tuning into a station
There are various ways of tuning into astation.
Automatic Seek Tuning:
⇒ Press the or button (8).
The unit tunes into the next receivable sta-tion.
Tuning Into Stations Manually:
You can also tune into stations manually.
⇒ Press the << or >> button (8).
NOTE
You can only tune into stations manu-ally if the RDS function is deactivated.
Browsing Through BroadcastingNetworks (Only FM):
If a radio station provides severalprogrammes (e.g. Radio1, Radio2, Radio3,etc.), you have the option of browsingthrough its so-called "broadcasting net-work".
To switch to the next station on the broad-casting network,
⇒ press the << or >> button (8).
When using this feature, you will only beable to switch to stations that you havereceived once already. To do so, use the scanor Travelstore function.
NOTE
The RDS function must be activatedbefore you can use this feature.
4–26 CLIMATE CONTROL AND AUDIO SYSTEM
⇒ Keep the SCAN (TS) button (15)pressed for longer than two seconds.
The station storing procedure begins. "T-Store" appears in the display. After theprocess is completed, the station that isstored in FMT memory location 1 will beplayed.
Listening to station presets:
⇒ Select the memory level or frequencyrange.
⇒ Press the station preset button 1 - 5 (12)that corresponds to the station youwant to listen to.
Setting the sensitivity of station seektuning
You can choose whether to only tune intostations with a strong reception or to alsotune into those with a weak reception.
⇒ Press the MENU button (11).
⇒ Keep pressing the or button (8)until "SENS HI" or "SENS LO" ap-pears in the display.
The display shows the currently set sensi-tivity level. "SENS HI6" means that thetuner is highly sensitive; "SENS LO1"means it is set to the lowest sensitivity set-ting.
If you select "SENS LO", "lo" lights up inthe display.
⇒ Set the required sensitivity using the <<or >> button (8).
When you have finished making yourchanges,
⇒ press the MENU button (11).
Storing station presets
Storing stations manually
⇒ Select the required memory, i.e. FM1,FM2, FMT, or one of the MW or LWfrequency ranges. To do so, briefly pressthe AM/FM button (14) repeatedlyuntil the required frequency range /memory level is displayed.
⇒ Tune into the required station.
⇒ Press one of the station buttons 1 - 5(12) for longer than two seconds tostore the station to that button.
Storing Stations Automatically(Travelstore):
You can automatically store the five sta-tions with the strongest reception in theregion (only for FM). The stations arestored in the FMT memory.
NOTE
Any stations that were previously storedon this memory level are deleted in theprocess.
CLIMATE CONTROL AND AUDIO SYSTEM 4–27
Programme type (PTY)
Besides transmitting the station name, someFM stations also provide information onthe type of programme that they are broad-casting. Your radio can receive and displaythis information.
For example, the programme types can be:CULTURE TRAVEL JAZZSPORT NEWS POPROCK CLASSICS
Using the PTY function, you can directlyselect stations of a particular programmetype.
PTY-EONIf you specify the programme type and startseek tuning, the unit will switch from thecurrent station to a station of the selectedprogramme type.
Scanning receivable stations (SCAN)
You can briefly play (scan) all the receivablestations. You can set the scanning time tobetween 5 and 30 seconds in the menu.
Starting Scan:
⇒ Briefly press the SCAN (TS) button (15).
Scanning begins. "SCAN" appears brieflyin the display followed by a flashing dis-play of the current station name or fre-quency.
Stopping Scan and continuing listening toa station:
⇒ Press the SCAN (TS) button (15).
Scanning is stopped and the station thatwas tuned into last will remain active.
Setting the scantime
⇒ Press the MENU button (11).
⇒ Keep pressing the or button (8)until "SCANTIME" appears in the dis-play.
⇒ Set the required scantime using the <<or >> button (8).
When you have finished making yourchanges,
⇒ press the MENU button (11) twice.
NOTE
The set scantime also applies to cassetteand CD changer mode.
NOTE
If no station is found that correspondsto the selected programme type, you willhear a beep and "NO PTY" appearsbriefly in the display. The radio will thenretune to the station that you listened tolast.
4–28 CLIMATE CONTROL AND AUDIO SYSTEM
Storing a Programme Type On a StationButton:
⇒ Select a programme type using the <<or >> button (8).
⇒ Keep the required station button 1 - 512 pressed for longer than two seconds.
The programme type is now stored on theselected button 1 - 5 (12).
Selecting The PTY Language:
You can set the language in which theprogramme type is displayed.
⇒ Press the MENU button (11).
⇒ Keep pressing the or button (8)until "PTY LANG" appears in the dis-play.
⇒ Press the << or >> button (8) to switchbetween German, English and French.
When the required language appears in thedisplay,
⇒ press the MENU button (11) twice.
NOTE
If the tuned radio station or anotherstation on the broadcasting networkbroadcasts the required programme typeat a later point in time, the radio auto-matically switches from the currentlytuned station or from cassette / CDchanger mode to the station whoseprogramme type matches the type youselected.
Switching PTY ON/OFF
⇒ Keep the TR (PTY) button (13) presseduntil "PTY" appears in or disappearsfrom the display.
The programme type that was selected lastappears briefly in the display when youswitch PTY on.
Selecting a Programme Type And StartingSeek Tuning:
⇒ Press the << or >> button (8).
The current programme type appears in thedisplay.
⇒ If you want to select anotherprogramme type, you can do so bypressing the << or >> button (8) whilstthis display is visible.
Or
⇒ Press one of the buttons 1 - 5 (12) toselect a programme type that is storedon one of these buttons.
The selected programme type is displayedbriefly.
⇒ Press the or button (8) to start seektuning.
The next station corresponding to yourselected programme type will then be tunedinto.
CLIMATE CONTROL AND AUDIO SYSTEM 4–29
TRAFFIC INFORMATION RECEPTION
Your radio unit is equipped with an RDS-EON receiver. EON stands for EnhancedOther Network.
If a traffic announcement is transmitted, theunit automatically switches from a stationthat does not provide traffic informationto a station within the same broadcastingnetwork that does.
Once the traffic announcement has beenheard, you will be switched back to theprogramme that you were listening to be-fore.
Switching traffic information priorityON/OFF
⇒ Press the TR (PTY) button (13).
Traffic announcement priority is activewhen TRAFFIC lights up in the display.
Optimising radio reception
Treble Reduction Feature During Interference(HICUT)
The HICUT function improves receptionduring poor radio reception (only FM). Ifinterference occurs, the treble is automati-cally reduced thus reducing the interferencelevel.
Switching HICUT ON/OFF:
⇒ Press the MENU button (11).
⇒ Keep pressing the or button (8)until "HICUT" appears in the display.
⇒ Press the << or >> button (8) to setHICUT.
"HICUT 0" means no reduction will bemade; "HICUT 1" means the treble andinterference levels will be reduced automati-cally.
When you have finished making yourchanges,
⇒ press the MENU button (11).
Displaying scrolling text
Some radio stations use the RDS signal totransmit advertising or other informationinstead of their station name. These scroll-ing texts appear in the display.
You can deactivate the scrolling text display.
⇒ Keep the RDS button (3) pressed until"NAME FIX" appears in the display.
To allow scrolling texts to be displayedagain,
⇒ keep the RDS button (3) pressed until"NAME VAR" appears in the display.
J221_04_EN-R.pmd 2007-02-15, 13:5729
4–30 CLIMATE CONTROL AND AUDIO SYSTEM
CASSETTE MODE
Cassette playback
If there is no cassette inserted in the unityet,
⇒ insert a cassette with its open edge onthe right into the cassette compartment(5).
The side of the cassette that is uppermostis then played first of all.
If a cassette is already inserted in the unit,⇒ keep pressing the SRC button (7) until
"CASSETTE" appears in the display.
The cassette is played in the direction thatwas set last.
Cassette eject
⇒ Press the button (4).
The cassette is ejected.
⇒ Remove the cassette.
NOTE
You will hear a warning sound:
• if you leave the reception area of atraffic information station that youare currently listening to.
• if, while listening to a cassette or CD,you leave the reception area of a traf-fic information station that you aretuned into, and the subsequent auto-matic search cannot find a new trafficinformation station.
• if you retune the radio from a trafficinformation station to a station thatdoes not broadcast traffic infor-mation.
If you hear the warning sound, you caneither switch off traffic information prior-ity or tune into a station that broadcaststraffic information.
Setting the volume for trafficannouncements
⇒ Press the MENU button (11).
⇒ Keep pressing the or button (8)until "TAVOLUME" appears in the dis-play.
⇒ Set the volume using the << or >> but-ton (8).
To help you adjust the volume more easily,the volume will be increased / decreased asyou make your changes.
When you have finished making yourchanges,
⇒ press the MENU button (11) twice.
NOTE
Using the volume control (1), you canalso adjust the volume during a trafficannouncement for the duration of thatannouncement.
CLIMATE CONTROL AND AUDIO SYSTEM 4–31
Repeating tracks
⇒ Press the 3 RPT button (12).
"RPT TRCK" appears briefly and RPTlights up in the display. At the end of thetrack, the tape is rewound to the beginningand the track is repeated.
To stop repeating the track,
⇒ press the 3 RPT button (12) again.
Normal playback is then continued. "RPTOFF" appears briefly and RPT disappearsfrom the display.
Changing the playback direction
To switch between the two playback direc-tions TAPE1 and TAPE2,
⇒ press the button (6).
NOTE
The direction of play is automaticallyswitched over when the end of the tapeis reached (autoreverse).
Skipping tracks (S-CPS)
If you want to play the next track or anytrack thereafter,
⇒ press the button (8) once or severaltimes.
"CPS FF" appears in the display togetherwith the number of tracks to be skipped.The tape is fast forwarded to the next trackor any other subsequent track that youselected.
If you want to select one of the previoustracks,
⇒ press the button (8) once or severaltimes.
"CPS FR" appears in the display togetherwith the number of tracks to be skipped.The tape is rewound to the beginning of thecurrent track or to the beginning of anyother previous track that you selected.
Cancelling S-CPS:If you want to cancel the track seek func-tion,
⇒ press the S-CPS button (8) for the op-posite direction, or the button (6),or one of the << / >> buttons (8).
Fast tape winding
Fast-Forwarding:
⇒ Press the >> button (8).
"FORWARD" appears in the display.
Fast-Rewinding:
⇒ Press the << button (8).
"REWIND" appears in the display.
Stopping Tape Winding:
⇒ Press one of the << / >> buttons (8) or / buttons (8).
Playback is continued.
NOTE
Whilst the tape is fast winding, you canlisten to the radio station that was tunedinto last.
To use this feature, "radiomonitor"must be activated.
4–32 CLIMATE CONTROL AND AUDIO SYSTEM
Skipping blank spaces (blankskip)
You can automatically skip blank spaceson the tape that are longer than ten sec-onds. To do so, the blankskip feature mustbe activated.
Scanning all the tracks on a cassette(SCAN)
You can briefly play (scan) all the tracks ona cassette.
⇒ Press the SCAN button (15).
"CAS SCAN" appears in the display. Allthe tracks on the cassette are briefly playedin ascending order.
To stop scanning,
⇒ press the SCAN button (15) again.
The currently scanned track will then con-tinue to be played normally.
NOTE
• You can set the scantime. For furtherdetails, read the section entitled "Set-ting the scantime" in the "Radiomode" chapter.
• In order to be able to use the S-CPS,RPT and SCAN functions, theremust be a pause of at least three sec-onds between each track on the cas-sette.
Pausing playback
You can pause the cassette whilst it is play-ing,
⇒ to do so, press the 2 button (12).
Playback is paused and "PAUSE" appearsin the display.
To cancel pause mode,
⇒ press the 2 button (12) again.
Switching radiomonitor ON/OFF
NOTE
You can only switch the radiomonitoron/off whilst a cassette is playing.
⇒ Press the MENU button (11).
⇒ Keep pressing the or button (8)until "RM ON" or "RM OFF“ ap-pears in the display.
⇒ Press the << or >> button (8) to switchthe radiomonitor on/off.
When you have finished making yourchanges,
⇒ press the MENU button (11).
Switching Blankskip ON/OFF
⇒ Press the MENU button (11).
⇒ Keep pressing the or button (8)until "BLK SKIP" appears in the display.
To switch blankskip on/off,
⇒ press the << or >> button (8).
When you have finished making yourchanges,
⇒ press the MENU button (11) twice.
NOTE
You can only switch "blankskip" on/offwhilst a cassette is playing.
CLIMATE CONTROL AND AUDIO SYSTEM 4–33
Switching to CD changer mode
⇒ Keep pressing the SRC button (7) until"CHANGER" appears in the display.
Playback begins with the first CD that theCD changer detects.
Selecting CDs
To move up or down to another CD,
⇒ press the or button (8) once orseveral times.
or
⇒ briefly press the button of the CD com-partment (17) in which the required CDis located.
Selecting the tape type
If you play a cassette with a "metal" or"CrO2" type tape, you should set the tapetype to "MTL ON".
To select the tape type,
⇒ Press the 1 MTL button (12).
"MTL ON" or "MTLOFF" appears brieflyin the display. MTL lights up in the displayif MTL is selected as the tape type.
Dolby* B noise suppression
If you play cassettes that were recordedusing the Dolby B process, you shouldswitch on the Dolby feature.
⇒ Press the 5 button (12).
If the Dolby feature is activated, lightsup in the display.
* Noise suppression system manufactured under license from
Dolby Laboratories. The word "Dol by" and the double-D sym-
bol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
CD CHANGER MODE
Inserting a CD
The CD changer can hold five CDs with adiameter of 12 cm.
⇒ Gently insert the CD with the printedside uppermost into the required CDcompartment (16) until you feel someresistance.
The CD is drawn into the drive automati-cally. You can insert CDs even if the unit isswitched off. The unit switches off againafter the CD has been drawn in.
Ejecting a CD
⇒ Press and hold the button (17) of theCD compartment containing the CDthat you want to eject until the CD isejected.
If you do not remove the CD within 10seconds, it will be drawn back in automati-cally. You can eject CDs even if the unit isswitched off. The unit switches off againafter the CD has been ejected.
NOTE
Do not use force when inserting/remov-ing the CD. You must not hinder orassist the drive as it draws in or ejectsthe CD.
4–34 CLIMATE CONTROL AND AUDIO SYSTEM
To play the tracks on all inserted CDs inrandom order,
⇒ press the 4 MIX button (12) again.
"MIX ALL" appears briefly and MIX lightsup in the display.
Stopping MIX:
⇒ Press the 4 MIX button (12) until "MIXOFF" appears briefly in the display andMIX disappears.
Scanning all tracks on all CDs (SCAN)
You can briefly play all the tracks on all theinserted CDs in ascending order,
⇒ press the SCAN button (15).
"SCAN" appears in the display.
Stopping SCAN:
If you want to stop scanning,
⇒ press the SCAN button (15).
The currently scanned track will then con-tinue to be played normally.
Selecting tracks
To move up or down to another track onthe current CD,
⇒ press the << or >> button (8) once orseveral times.
Quick track selection
To quickly select tracks backwards or for-wards,
⇒ keep one of the / buttons (8)pressed until fast-reverse / fast-forwardtrack selection begins.
Fast searching (audible)
To fast search backwards or forwards,
⇒ keep one of the << / >> buttons (8)pressed until fast reversing / fast for-warding begins.
Repeating individual tracks or whole CDs(REPEAT)
To repeat the current track,
⇒ briefly press the 3 RPT button (12).
"RPT TRCK" appears briefly and RPTlights up in the display.To repeat the current CD,
⇒ press the 3 RPT button (12) again.
"RPT DISC" appears briefly and RPT lightsup in the display.
Cancelling repeat:To stop the current track or current CDfrom being repeated,
⇒ keep pressing 3 RPT button (12) until"RPT OFF" appears briefly in the dis-play and RPT disappears.
Random play (MIX)
To play the tracks on the current CD inrandom order,
⇒ briefly press the 4 MIX button (12).
"MIX CD" appears briefly and MIX lightsup in the display.
CLIMATE CONTROL AND AUDIO SYSTEM 4–35
Pausing playback (PAUSE)
⇒ Press button 2 (12).
"PAUSE" appears in the display.
Cancelling Pause:
⇒ Press button 2 (12) whilst in pausemode.
Playback is continued.
NOTE
You can set the scantime. For furtherdetails, please read the section entitled"Setting the scantime" in the "Radiomode" chapter.
Changing the display
You can switch between the track number /CD number display and the track number/ playing time display.
⇒ Press the MENU button (11).
⇒ Keep pressing the or button (8)until "CDC DISP" appears in the dis-play.
⇒ Press the << or >> button (8).
The current setting is displayed. "TIME"indicates the playing time and track num-ber display. "CD NO" indicates the CDnumber and track number display.
⇒ Press the << or >> button (8) to selectthe required setting.
When you have finished making yourchanges,
⇒ press the MENU button (11) twice.
REMOVABLE CONTROL PANEL
Theft protection
As a way of protecting your car radioagainst theft, the unit is equipped with adetachable control panel (release panel).Without this control panel, the car radio isworthless to a thief.
Protect your car radio against theft by tak-ing the control panel with you every timeyou leave your vehicle. Do not leave thecontrol panel in your vehicle - not even ina hiding place.
The control panel has been designed to beeasy to use.
NOTE
• Never expose the detached controlpanel to direct sunlight or other heatsources.
• Avoid making direct skin contact withthe control panel's contacts. If neces-sary, clean the contacts with a lint-freecloth and some alcohol.
4–36 CLIMATE CONTROL AND AUDIO SYSTEM
Attaching the control panel
⇒ Slide the control panel from left to rightinto the unit's guide.
⇒ Press the left-hand edge of the controlpanel into the unit until it clicks intoplace.
detaching the control panel
⇒ Press the button (2).
The control panel locking mechanismopens.
⇒ First, pull the control panel straight offthe unit and then out towards the left.
• The unit switches off after the controlpanel is removed.
• All the current settings are saved.
• Any cassette already inserted in the unitremains there. If the unit was still switched on when you
detached the control panel, the unit willautomatically switch on with the last set-tings activated (i.e. radio, cassette or CDchanger) when the panel is replaced.
NOTE
When attaching the control panel, makesure you do not press the display.
CARE AND CLEANING TIPS
Please observe the following points whenlooking after and cleaning the unit.
Never leave audio cassettes in one of thefollowing places:
• On top of the dashboard.
• In areas subjected to direct sunlight orhigh temperatures.
• Near loudspeakers or strong magneticfields.
Cleaning the audio head:
• To maintain the highest possible soundquality when playing cassettes, clean theaudio head regularly.
• If you use a cleaning tape, read the clean-ing tape's operating instructions beforeusing.
2
S3W4152A
S3W4153A
CLIMATE CONTROL AND AUDIO SYSTEM 4–37
Handling CDs
Avoid touching the playing surface of theCD. Only hold the CD at its centre andedge.
After use, store CDs in their cases.
Never expose CDs to direct sunlight orhigh temperatures.
NOTE
Using the cleaning tape too often candamage the audio head.
NOTE
• Never open the units' casings• Never spill liquid into or onto the
units.
Cleaning the unit
• If the front of the unit is dusty, wipe itclean with a dry, dust-free cloth. Switchthe unit off beforehand.
• Never use turpentine, turpentine substi-tute (thinners) or alcohol to clean theunit. These fluids can damage the plas-tic and remove the labelling from thekeys.
4–38 CLIMATE CONTROL AND AUDIO SYSTEM
SPECIFICATIONS (EXCERPTS)
Power supply Direct current 14.4 V
Loudspeaker impedance 4 – 8 ohm (4 loudspeakers)
Output power 4 x 20 watts sine in accordance with DIN 45 324 at 14.4 V / 4 x 40 watts max. power
CD CHANGER COMPONENT
Type and model Compact Disc Digital Audio
System
CD format 12 cm compact disc
Frequency response 20 – 20,000 Hz
Distortion factor < 0.1 %
Dynamic range > 80 dB
Signal-to-noise ratio > 80 dB
Channel separation > 70 dB
RADIO COMPONENT
Frequency range FM: 87.5 – 108.0 MHz
MW: 531 – 1602 kHz
LW: 153 – 279 kHz
Input sensitivity AM: 27 dBµV at 20 dB S/N
FM: 5 dBµV at 26 dB S/N
LW: 30 dBµV at 20 dB S/N
Signal-to-noise ratio FM/ AM: 55 dB
Stereo channel separation 26 dB
CASSETTE COMPONENT
Tape speed 4.76 cm/ sec.
Wow and flutter < 0.35 %
Signal-to-noise ratio > 50 dB with Dolby
Cross talk > 40 dB
Frequency response 30 – 12,000 Hz
CLIMATE CONTROL AND AUDIO SYSTEM 4–39
RDS RADIO AND CDBefore using the device for the first time,please read these instructions carefully.
WARNING
Road safety has absolute priority. Onlyoperate your car radio if the road andtraffic conditions allow you to do so.Familiarise yourself with the unit beforesetting off on your journey.When inside your vehicle, you shouldalways be able to hear police, fire fighterand ambulance sirens in time. For thisreason, set the volume of whatever youare listening to to a reasonable level.
WARNING
The audio system can be damagedwhen starting the vehicle with jump leads.Switch the system off.
CONTROLS
N4W4172A
4–40 CLIMATE CONTROL AND AUDIO SYSTEM
1. button to release the control panel.
2. Long press: Button, to switch the uniton/off,
Short press: To mute the unit’s volume.
3. Volume control.
4. CD compartment.
5. Arrow buttons.
6. Long press: ) – CD eject.
Short press: SRC button, to select theCD, radio, CD changer or CompactDrive MP3 (if connected) and AUXsources.
7. Short press: MENU button to open thebasic settings menu.
Long press: to start the scan function.
8. X-BASS button, to adijust the X-Bassfunction.
9. AUDIO button, to adjust the bass,treble, balance and fader settings.
10. Keys 1 - 6.
11. Short press: TRAF button to switchtraffic information standby on/off.
Long press: RDS button, to switch theRDS feature on/off.
12. Short press: BND button, to select theFM memory banks and MW/LWwavebands (MW and LW not on theKiel CD32), and to select radio modeas the source.
Long press: TS, to start the Travelstorefunction.
CLIMATE CONTROL AND AUDIO SYSTEM 4–41
RECEPTION INTERFERENCE
Radio reception is affected by the station’ssignal strength and the distance to the ra-dio station, buildings, bridges, mountains,etc.
Variations in reception quality can becaused by external influences.
DISPLAY
1. Volume spectrum display.
2. Main display area.
3. Dolby symbol, illuminates when theDolby function is activated.
4. RPT indicator, illuminates when the re-peat function is activated.
5. RDS indicator, illuminates when theRDS function is activated.
6. MIX indicator, illuminates when theMIX function is activated (only if a CDchanger is connected).
7. lo indicator, illuminates when the seektuning sensitivity is set to “lo”.
8. PTY indicator, illuminates when PTYis activated.
9. Traffic jam symbol, illuminates whenradio traffic information is activated.
10. X-BASS indicator, illuminates when X-BASS is activated.
11. CD symbol, illuminates if a CD is inthe unit.
N4W4173A
4–42 CLIMATE CONTROL AND AUDIO SYSTEM
GENERAL OPERATION
Switching ON/OFF
Switching on/off using the vehicle ignition:If you did not switch the unit off usingbutton (2) and the removable control panelis attached, you can turn the unit on/offsimultaneously with the vehicle ignition.
You can switch the unit on even if the igni-tion is off:
⇒ To do so, press button (2).
NOTE
To protect the vehicle battery, the unitwill switch off automatically after onehour if the ignition is off.
Switching ON/OFF using the detachablecontrol panel:
⇒ Remove the control panel.
The unit switches off.
⇒ Attach the control panel again.
The unit switches on. The settings (radio,CD, CD changer or AUX) that were setbefore the unit was switched off will be re-activated.
Switching ON/OFF using button (2):
⇒ To switch the unit on, press button (2).
⇒ To switch the unit off, press button (2)for longer than two seconds.
Switching ON by inserting a CD:
If the unit is switched off and there is noCD inserted in the drive,
⇒ gently insert the CD into the drive untilyou feel some resistance.
The CD will be drawn into the drive auto-matically. The unit switches on. CD play-back begins.
NOTE
You must not hinder or assist the driveas it draws in the CD.
CLIMATE CONTROL AND AUDIO SYSTEM 4–43
Adjusting the volume
The system volume can be adjusted in stepsfrom 0 (off) to 41 (maximum).
To increase the system volume,
⇒ turn the knob (3) in a clockwise direc-tion.
To decrease the system volume,
⇒ turn the knob (3) in an anticlockwisedirection.
Sstting the power-on volume:
You can set the volume that you want theunit to play at when it is switched on.
⇒ Press the MENU button (7).
⇒ Keep pressing the or button (5)until “ON VOL” appears in the dis-play.
⇒ Set the power-on volume using the or button (5).
To help you adjust the volume more easily,the volume will be increased / decreased asyou make your changes.
NOTE
To protect your hearing, the power-onvolume is limited to a value of “30”. Ifthe volume level was higher when theunit was switched off and the power-onvolume is set to “0”, the unit will switchon again with a volume level of “30”.
When you have finished making yourchanges,
⇒ press the MENU button (7) twice.
If you change the setting to “0”, the power-on volume will be the same as the volumelevel that you heard before the unit was lastswitched off.
Instantaneously reducing the volume(mute)
You can instantaneously reduce the volume(mute) to a level preset by you.
⇒ Briefly press button (3).
“MUTE” appears in the display.
Setting The Mute Level:
You can set the unit’s volume mute level.
⇒ Press the MENU button (7).
⇒ Keep pressing the or button (5)until “MUTE LVL” appears in the dis-play.
⇒ Set the mute level using the or button (5).
When you have finished making yourchanges,
⇒ press the MENU button (7) twice.
4–44 CLIMATE CONTROL AND AUDIO SYSTEM
Mute while telephoning
If your unit is connected to a mobile tele-phone, the car radio’s volume will be mutedas soon as you “pick up” the telephone.This will only work if the mobile telephoneis connected to the unit correctly.
If a traffic announcement is received dur-ing a telephone call and traffic informationpriority has been activated, the traffic an-nouncement will only be played once thephone call is ended. For further details, readthe chapter entitled “Traffic informationreception”.
The volume will be reduced to the set mutevolume level.
Configuring the confirmation beep
For some functions you will hear a confir-mation beep if you keep a button pressedfor longer than two seconds, e.g. when stor-ing a radio station to a station preset but-ton.
You can switch the confirmation beep on/off.
⇒ Press the MENU button (7).
⇒ Keep pressing the or button (5)until “BEEP OFF” or “BEEP ON” ap-pears in the display.
“BEEP OFF” means that the confirmationbeep is switched off, “BEEP ON” means itis switched on.
⇒ Use the / buttons (5) to switch be-tween the settings.
When you have finished making yourchanges,
⇒ press the MENU button (7).
Sound and volume distribution settings
You can adjust the sound settings (bass andtreble) separately for each source (radio,CD, CD changer and AUX). The volumedistribution settings (fader and balance)apply to all the audio sources.
Adjusting the bass:
To adjust the bass,
⇒ press the AUDIO button (9).
“BASS” appears in the display.
⇒ Press the or button (5) to adjustthe bass.
When you have finished making yourchanges,
⇒ press the AUDIO button (9).
CLIMATE CONTROL AND AUDIO SYSTEM 4–45
Adjusting the treble:
To adjust the treble,
⇒ press the AUDIO button (9).
“BASS” appears in the display.
⇒ Keep pressing the or button (5)until “TREB” appears in the display.
⇒ Press the or button (5) to adjustthe treble.
When you have finished making yourchanges,
⇒ press the AUDIO button (9).
Adjusting the left/right volumedistribution (balance):
To adjust the left/right volume distribution(balance),
⇒ press the AUDIO button (9).
“BASS” appears in the display.
⇒ Keep pressing the or button (5)until “BAL” appears in the display.
⇒ Press the or button (5) to adjustthe balance (left/right).
When you have finished making yourchanges,
⇒ press the AUDIO button (9).
Adjusting the front/back volumedistribution (fader):
To adjust the front/back volume distribu-tion (fader),
⇒ press the AUDIO button (9).
“BASS” appears in the display.
⇒ Keep pressing the or button (5)until “FADER” appears in the display.
⇒ Press the or button (5) to adjustthe balance (back/front).
When you have finished making yourchanges,
⇒ press the AUDIO button (9).
4–46 CLIMATE CONTROL AND AUDIO SYSTEM
X-BASS
The X-BASS feature can be used to boostthe bass at low volume levels.
RADIO MODE
This unit is equipped with an RDS radioreceiver. Many of the receivable FM stationstransmit a signal that not only carries theprogramme but also additional information such as the station name andprogramme type (PTY). The station nameappears in the display as soon as it is re-ceived.
Switching to radio mode
If you are in CD or CD changer mode,
⇒ press the BND•TS button (12)or⇒ keep pressing the SRC button (6) until
the unit switches to radio mode.
“RADIO” appears in the display.
Convenient RDS functions (AF, REG)
The convenient RDS functions AF (Alter-native Frequency) and REG (Regional) ex-tend your radio’s range of functions.
• AF: If this RDS function is activated, theunit automatically tunes into the bestreceivable frequency for the station thatis currently set.
• REG: At certain times, some radio sta-tions divide their programme into re-gional programmes providing differentregional content. You can use the REGfunction to prevent the car radio fromswitching to alternative frequencies thatare transmitting different programmecontent.
NOTE
You can adjust the X-BASS settingsseparately for each audio source (radio,CD, CD changer and AUX).
The X-BASS boost can be set in steps rang-ing from 1 to 3.
“X-BASS OFF” means that the X-BASSfeature is switched off.
⇒ Press the X-BASS button (8).
⇒ Keep pressing one of the / or / buttons (5) until the required setting
appears in the display.
If you set the X-BASS boost to a value of1, 2 or 3, the X-BASS indicator appears inthe display.
When you have finished making yourchanges,
⇒ press the X-BASS button (8).
NOTE
REG must be separately activated/deac-tivated in the menu.
Switching REG ON/OFF:
⇒ Press the MENU button (7).
⇒ Keep pressing the or button (5)
until “REG” appears in the display.“OFF” or “ON” is displayed alongside
“REG”
⇒ To switch REG on/off, press the or button (5).
When you have finished making yourchanges,
⇒ press the MENU button (7).
CLIMATE CONTROL AND AUDIO SYSTEM 4–47
Switching the RDS Funtion ON/OFF:
⇒ To use the RDS functions (AF andREG), press the TRAF•RDS button(11) for longer than two seconds.
If you activated the RDS function, “RDS”lights up in the display.
Selecting the frequency range/memorylevel
This unit can receive programmes broad-cast over the FM frequency range as wellas the MW and LW (AM) ranges.
There are three preset memory levels for theFM frequency range (FM1, FM2 and FMT)and one for each of the MW and LWranges.
You can store six stations on each memorylevel.
To switch between the memory levels orfrequency ranges,
⇒ briefly press BND•TS button (12) re-peatedly until the required frequencyrange / memory level is displayed.
Tuning into a station
There are various ways of tuning into astation.
Automatic Seek Tuning:
⇒ Press the or button (5).
The unit tunes into the next receivable sta-tion.
Tuning into Stations Manually:
You can also tune into stations manually.
⇒ Press the or button (5).
Browsing Through Broadcasting Net-works (only FM):
If a radio station provides severalprogrammes (e.g. Radio1, Radio2, Radio3,etc.), you have the option of browsingthrough its so-called “broadcasting net-work”.
NOTE
You can only tune into stations manu-ally if the RDS function is deactivated.
NOTE
The RDS function must be activated be-fore you can use this feature.
To switch to the next station on the broad-casting network,
⇒ press the or button (5).
When using this feature, you will only beable to switch to stations that you havereceived once already. To do so, use the scanor Travelstore function.
4–48 CLIMATE CONTROL AND AUDIO SYSTEM
Setting the sensitivity of station seektuning
You can choose whether to only tune intostations with a strong reception or to alsotune into those with a weak reception.
⇒ Press the MENU button (7).
⇒ Keep pressing the or button (5)until “SENS HI” or “SENS LO” ap-pears in the display.
The display shows the currently set sensi-tivity level. “SENS HI6” means that thetuner is highly sensitive; “SENS LO1”means it is set to the lowest sensitivity set-ting.
If you select “SENS LO”, “lo” lights up inthe display.
⇒ Set the required sensitivity using the or button (5).
When you have finished making yourchanges,
⇒ press the MENU button (7).
Storing station presets
Storing Stations Manually:
⇒ Select the required memory, i.e. FM1,FM2, FMT or one of the MW or LWfrequency ranges. To do so, brieflypress the BND•TS button (12) repeat-edly until the required frequency range/memory level is displayed.
⇒ Tune into the required station.
⇒ Press one of the station buttons 1 - 6(10) for longer than two seconds tostore the station to that button.
Storing Stations Automatically (Travelstore):
You can automatically store the six stationswith the strongest reception in the region(only for FM). The stations are stored inthe FMT memory.
⇒ Keep the BND•TS button (12) pressedfor longer than two seconds.
The station storing procedure begins. “T-STORE” appears in the display. After theprocess is completed, the station that isstored in FMT memory location 1 will beplayed.
Listening to Station Presets:
⇒ Select the memory level or frequencyrange.
⇒ Press the station preset button 1 - 6 (10)that corresponds to the station youwant to listen to.
NOTE
Any stations that were previously storedon this memory level are deleted in theprocess.
CLIMATE CONTROL AND AUDIO SYSTEM 4–49
Scanning receivable stations (SCAN)
You can briefly play (scan) all the receivablestations. You can set the scanning time tobetween 5 and 30 seconds in the menu.
Starting Scan:
⇒ Briefly press the MENU button (7) forlonger than two seconds.
Scanning begins. “SCAN” appears brieflyin the display followed by a flashing dis-play of the current station name or fre-quency.
Stopping Scan and Continuing Listening toa Station:
⇒ Press the MENU button (7).
Scanning is stopped and the station thatwas tuned into last will remain active.
Programme type (PTY)
Besides transmitting the station name, someFM stations also provide information onthe type of programme that they are broad-casting. Your radio can receive and displaythis information.
For example, the programme types can be:
CULTURE TRAVEL JAZZ
SPORT NEWS POP
ROCK CLASSICS
Using the PTY function, you can directlyselect stations of a particular programmetype.
Pty-Eon
If you specify the programme type and startseek tuning, the unit will switch from thecurrent station to a station of the selectedprogramme type.
Setting the scantime
⇒ Press the MENU button (7).
⇒ Keep pressing the or button (5)until “SCANTIME” appears in the dis-play.
⇒ Set the required scantime using the or button (5).
When you have finished making yourchanges,
⇒ press the MENU button (7) twice.
4–50 CLIMATE CONTROL AND AUDIO SYSTEM
Selecting a Programme Type and StartingSeek Tuning:
⇒ Press the or button (5).
The current programme type appears in thedisplay.
⇒ If you want to select anotherprogramme type, you can do so bypressing the or button (5) whilstthis display is visible.
Or
⇒ Press one of the buttons 1 - 6 (10) toselect a programme type that is storedon one of these buttons.
The selected programme type is displayedbriefly.
⇒ Press the or button (5) to startseek tuning.
The next station corresponding to yourselected programme type will then be tunedinto.
NOTE
If no station is found that correspondsto the selected programme type, you willhear a beep and “NO PTY” appearsbriefly in the display. The radio will thenretune to the station that you listened tolast.
NOTE
If the tuned radio station or another sta-tion on the broadcasting network broad-casts the required programme type at alater point in time, the radio automati-cally switches from the currently tunedstation or from CD / CD changer modeto the station whose programme typematches the type you selected.
Switching PTY ON/OFF
⇒ Press the MENU button (7).
⇒ Keep pressing the or button (5)until “PTY ON” or “PTY OFF” ap-pears in the display.
⇒ Press the or button (5) to switchbetween the setting.
When you have finished making yourchanges,
⇒ press the MENU button (7).
CLIMATE CONTROL AND AUDIO SYSTEM 4–51
Storing a Programme Type on a StationButton:
⇒ Select a programme type using the or button (5).
⇒ Keep the required station button 1 - 6(10) pressed for longer than two sec-onds.
The programme type is now stored on theselected button 1 - 6 (10).
Selecting the PTY Language:
You can set the language in which theprogramme type is displayed.
⇒ Press the MENU button (7).
⇒ Keep pressing the or button (5)until “PTY LANG” appears in the dis-play.
⇒ Press the or button (5) to switchbetween German, English and French.
When the required language appears in thedisplay,
⇒ press the MENU button (7) twice.
Optimising radio reception
TREBLE REDUCTION FEATURE DUR-ING INTERFERENCE (HICUT)
The HICUT function improves receptionduring poor radio reception (only FM). Ifinterference occurs, the treble is automati-cally reduced thus reducing the interferencelevel.
Switching Hicut ON/OFF:
⇒ Press the MENU button (7).
⇒ Keep pressing the or button (5)until “HICUT” appears in the display.
⇒ Press the or button (5) to setHICUT.
“HICUT 0” means no reduction will bemade; “HICUT 1” means the treble andinterference levels will be reduced automati-cally.
When you have finished making yourchanges,
⇒ press the MENU button (7).
Traffic information reception
Your radio unit is equipped with an RDS-EON receiver. EON stands for EnhancedOther Network.
If a traffic announcement is transmitted, theunit automatically switches from a stationthat does not provide traffic informationto a station within the same broadcastingnetwork that does.
Once the traffic announcement has beenheard, you will be switched back to theprogramme that you were listening to be-fore.
Switching traffic information priority ON/OFF
⇒ Press the TRAF•RDS button (11).
Traffic announcement priority is activewhen a traffic jam symbol lights up in thedisplay.
4–52 CLIMATE CONTROL AND AUDIO SYSTEM
If you hear the warning sound, you caneither switch off traffic information prior-ity or tune into a station that broadcaststraffic information.
Setting the volume for trafficannouncements
⇒ Press the MENU button (7).
⇒ Keep pressing the or button (5)until “TAVOLUME” appears in thedisplay.
⇒ Set the volume using the or button(5).
To help you adjust the volume more easily,the volume will be increased / decreased asyou make your changes.
When you have finished making yourchanges,
⇒ press the MENU button (7) twice.
CD MODECD Playback
• If there is no CD inserted in the drive.
⇒ Gently insert the CD with the printedside uppermost into the CD compart-ment until you feel some resistance.
The CD will be drawn automatically intothe drive.
Do not use force when inserting the CD.You must not hinder or assist the drive asit draws in the CD.
CD playback begins.
• If a CD is alrendy inserted in the drive.
⇒ Keep pressing the SRC button (6) until“CD” appears in the display.
Playback begins from the point at which itwas last interrupted.
NOTE
You will hear a warning sound:
• if you leave the reception area of atraffic information station that youare currently listening to.
• if, while listening to a CD or an AUXsource, you leave the reception area ofa traffic information station that youare tuned into and the subsequentautomatic search cannot find a newtraffic information station.
• if you retune the radio from a trafficinformation station to a station thatdoes not broadcast traffic informa-tion.
NOTE
Using the volume control (3), you canalso adjust the volume during a trafficannouncement for the duration of thatannouncement.
CLIMATE CONTROL AND AUDIO SYSTEM 4–53
Selecting tracks
⇒ Press one of the / or / button(5) to select the next or previous track.
If you press the / button (5) once, thecurrect track will be played again from thebeginning.
Quick track selection
To quickly select tracks backwards or for-wards,
⇒ keep one of the or buttons (5)pressed until fast-reverse / fast-forwardtrack selection begins.
Fast searching (audible)
To fast search backwards or forwards,
⇒ keep one of the buttons (5)pressed until fast searching back-wards/ forwards begins.
Random play (MIX)
⇒ Press button 5 (MIX) (10).
MIX appears in the display. The next ran-domly selected track will then be played.
Repeating tracks (REPEAT)
If you want to repeat a track,
⇒ press button 4 (RPT) (10).
RPT appears in the display. The track isrepeated until you deactivate RPT.
Cancelling REPEAT
If you want to cancel the repeat function,
press button 4 (RPT) (10) again.
RPT diappears. Normal playback is thencontinued.
Pausing playback (PAUSE)
⇒ Press button 3 ( ) (10).
“PAUSE” appears in the display.
Cancelling pause
⇒ Press button 3 ( ) (10) while in pausemode.
Playback is continued.
Cancelling MIX
⇒ Press button 5 (MIX) (10) again.
MIX disappears from the display.
Scanning tracks (SCAN)
You can briefly play all the tracks on a CD.
⇒ Hold down the MENU button (7) forlonger than two seconds.
NOTE
You can set the scantime. For furtherdetails, read the section entitled “Settingthe scantime” in the “Radio mode”chapter.
Stopping SCAN and continuing playback
To stop scanning,
⇒ briefly press the MENU button (7).
The current track will then continue to beplayed.
4–54 CLIMATE CONTROL AND AUDIO SYSTEM
CD CHANGER MODEAn optional CD changer can be used withthe radio. All the functions described in thischapter relate to the Blaupunkt CD changerCDC-A08.
Inserting a CD
The CDC A-08 CD changer is located inthe car boot. Follow the instructions belowfor inserting and changing CDs.
1. Opening the CD Changer:
2. Removing the CD magazine:
EJECT
EJECT
⇒ Press the eject button appearing with agrey background in the zoomed sectionof the diagram. The CD magazine isejected.
Changing the display
To switch between the track number dis-play and the track number / playing timedisplay,
⇒ press the MENU button (7).
⇒ Keep pressing the or button (5)until “CD DISP” appears in the display.
⇒ Press the button (5).
The current setting is displayed. “TIME”for the playing time display and “PLAY”for the track number display.
⇒ Press the button (5) to select the re-quired setting.
⇒ Press the MENU button (7) twice.
Removing the CD from the unit
To remove the CD from the unit,
⇒ keep the SRC button (6)pressed unit the CD is ejected.
⇒ Open the CD changer door by slidingthe door in the direction of the arrow.
NOTE
In order to avoid damaging the ejectmechanism, never hinder or assist theCD magazine whilst it is being ejected.
S3W4145A
S3W4146A
CLIMATE CONTROL AND AUDIO SYSTEM 4–55
3. Removing the CD trays:
⇒ Hold one of the CD trays by the“hook” that is located on its right handside (arrow in the zoomed section of thediagram), and carefully pull the tray outin the direction of the arrow.
4. Inserting a CD:
⇒ Place the CD – with its printed side fac-ing uppermost – onto the CD tray.
⇒ Carefully slide the CD tray back into themagazine’s guide slot. Make sure thatthe CD tray is positioned straight in theguide slot.
5. Inserting the magazine:
EJECT
⇒ Slide the magazine back into the changeruntil it clicks into place.
⇒ Close the door of the CD changer.
NOTE
• Always keep the door of the CDchanger closed.
• To remove a CD, proceed in the sameway as described.
NOTE
Do not use force when inserting/remov-ing the CD. You must not hinder orassist the drive as it draws in or ejectsthe CD.
Switching to CD changer mode
⇒ Keep pressing the SRC button (7) until“CHANGER” appears in the display.
Playback begins with the first CD that theCD changer detects.
Selecting CDs
To move up or down to another CD,
⇒ press the or button (5) once orseveral times.
S3W4147A
S3W4148A
S3W4149A
4–56 CLIMATE CONTROL AND AUDIO SYSTEM
Selecting tracks
To move up or down to another track onthe current CD,
⇒ press the or button (5) once or sev-eral times.
Quick track selection
To quickly select tracks backwards or for-wards,
⇒ keep one of the or buttons (5)pressed until fast-reverse / fast-forwardtrack selection begins.
Fast searching (audible)
To fast search backwards or forwards,
⇒ keep one of the or buttons (5)pressed until fast-reverse / fast-forwardbegins.
Repeating individual tracks or whole CDs(repeat)
To repeat the current track,
⇒ briefly press the 4 RPT button (10).
“RPT TRCK” appears briefly and RPTlights up in the display.
To repeat the current CD,
⇒ press the 4 RPT button (10) again.
“RPT DISC” appears briefly and RPT lightsup in the display.
Cancelling repeat:
To stop the current track or current CDfrom being repeated,
⇒ keep pressing 4 RPT button (10) until“RPT OFF” appears briefly in the dis-play and RPT disappears.
Random play (MIX)
To play the tracks on the current CD inrandom order,
⇒ press the 5 MIX button (10).
“MIX CD” appears briefly and MIX lightsup in the display.
To play the tracks on all inserted CDs inrandom order,
⇒ press the 5 MIX button (10) again.
“MIX ALL” appears briefly and MIX lightsup in the display.
Stopping MIX:
⇒ press the 5 MIX button (10) until “MIXOFF” appears briefly in the display andMIX disappears.
Scanning all tracks on all CDs (SCAN)
You can briefly play all the tracks on all theinserted CDs in ascending order,
⇒ press the MENU button (7) for longerthan two seconds.
“SCAN” appears in the display.
Stopping scan:
If you want to stop scanning,
⇒ press the MENU button (7).
The currently scanned track will then con-tinue to be played normally.
CLIMATE CONTROL AND AUDIO SYSTEM 4–57
Pausing playback (PAUSE)
⇒ Press button 3 (10).
“PAUSE” appears in the display.
Cancelling Pause:
⇒ Press button 3 (10) whilst in pausemode.
Playback is resumed.
Changing the display
You can switch between the track number/ CD number display and the track num-ber / playing time display.
⇒ Press the MENU button (7).
EXTERNAL AUDIO SOURCESInstead of connecting a CD changer, youcan connect another audio source equippedwith a line output. The audio source, forexample, can be a portable CD player,MiniDisc player or MP3 player.
The AUX input must be activated in themenu.
If you want to connect an external audiosource, you will need an adapter cable. Youcan obtain this cable from a Blaupunktdealer.
Switching the AUX input ON/OFF
⇒ Press the MENU button (7).
⇒ Keep pressing the or button (5)until “AUX OFF” or “AUX ON” ap-pears in the display.
⇒ Press the or button (5) to switchAUX on/off.
When you have finished making yourchanges,
⇒ press the MENU button (7).
⇒ Keep pressing the or button (5)until “CDC DISP” appears in the dis-play.
⇒ Press the or button (5).
The current setting is displayed. “TIME”indicates the playing time and track num-ber display. “CD NO” indicates the CDnumber and track number display.
⇒ Press the or button (5) to select therequired setting.
When you have finished making yourchanges,
⇒ press the MENU button (7) twice.
NOTE
You can set the scantime. For further de-tails, please read the section entitled “Set-ting the scantime” in the “Radio mode”chapter.
4–58 CLIMATE CONTROL AND AUDIO SYSTEM
NOTE
If the AUX input is switched on it canbe selected by pressing the SRC button 6.
REMOVABLE CONTROL PANELTheft protection
As a way of protecting your car radioagainst theft, the unit is equipped with adetachable control panel (release panel).
Without this control panel, the car radio isworthless to a thief.
Protect your car radio against theft by tak-ing the control panel with you every timeyou leave your vehicle. Do not leave thecontrol panel in your vehicle - not even ina hidden place.
The control panel has been designed to beeasy to use.
Detaching the control panel
1
⇒ Press the button (1).
The control panel locking mechanismopens.
⇒ First, pull the control panel straight offthe unit and then out towards the left.
• The unit switches off after the controlpanel is removed.
• All the current settings are saved.
• Any cassette already inserted in the unitremains there.
NOTE
• Never expose the detached controlpanel to direct sunlight or other heatsources.
• Avoid making direct skin contact withthe control panel’s contacts. If neces-sary, clean the contacts with a lint-freecloth and some alcohol.
S3W4152A
CLIMATE CONTROL AND AUDIO SYSTEM 4–59
CARE AND CLEANING TIPSPlease observe the following points whenlooking after and cleaning the unit.
Never leave audio CDs in one of thefollowing places:
• On top of the dashboard.
• In areas subjected to direct sunlight orhigh temperatures.
• Near loudspeakers or strong magneticfields.
Cleaning the audio head:
• To maintain the highest possible soundquality when playing CDs, clean theaudio head regularly.
• If you use a cleaning disc, read the clean-ing disc’s operating instructions beforeusing.
Cleaning the unit
• If the front of the unit is dusty, wipe itclean with a dry, dust-free cloth. Switchthe unit off beforehand.
• Never use turpentine, turpentine substi-tute (thinners) or alcohol to clean theunit. These fluids can damage the plas-tic and remove the labelling from thekeys.
Fogged up lens in the CD changer
The lens that focuses the CD changer’s la-ser beam may become fogged up in coldweather. No CDs can be played if the lensis fogged up. If this happens, open the CDchanger door and remove the magazine.The condensation on the lens will thenevaporate.
Attaching the control panel
⇒ Slide the control panel from left to rightinto the unit’s guide.
⇒ Press the left-hand edge of the controlpanel into the unit until it clicks intoplace.
NOTE
When attaching the control panel, makesure you do not press the display.
NOTE
Using the cleaning disc too often candamage the audio head.
S3W4153A
If the unit was still switched on when youdetached the control panel, the unit will au-tomatically switch on with the last settingsactivated (radio, CD, CD changer or AUX)when the panel is replaced.
4–60 CLIMATE CONTROL AND AUDIO SYSTEM
Handling CDs
Avoid touching the playing surface of theCD. Only hold the CD at its centre andedge.
After use, store CDs in their cases.
Never expose CDs to direct sunlight orhigh temperatures.
NOTE
The described situation occurs particu-larly if you insert a warm CD magazine(e.g. straight out of your home) into thecold CD changer.
NOTE
• Never open the units’ casings.• Never spill liquid into or onto the
units.
CLIMATE CONTROL AND AUDIO SYSTEM 4–61
Power supply Direct current 14.4 VLoudspeaker impedance 4 – 8 ohm (4 loudspeakers)Output power In accordance with DIN 45 324 at 14.4 V / 4 x 40 watts max. power
Frequency range FM: 87.5 – 108.0 MHzMW: 531 – 1602 kHzLW: 153 – 279 kHz
Input sensitivity FM: 6 dBaV at 26 dB S/NMW/ LW: 6 dBaV at26 dB S/N
Signal-to-noise ratio FM/ AM: 55 dBStereo channel separation 26 dB
Frequency response -3 dB x 1 dBSignal-to-noise ratio dB A 75 dBStereo crosstalk (1kHz) 67 dBDistortion (1kHz) 0.15%
SPECIFICATIONS (EXCERPTS)
RADIO COMPONENT
CD COMPONENT
4–62 CLIMATE CONTROL AND AUDIO SYSTEM
SRC
T7W4001B
REMOTE CONTROL SYSTEM *ON / OFF SWITCH
Short press : Mute or power on.
Long press : Power off.
SRC SWITCH
Press this switch to select the desired source.
Source changes as follows;
VOLUME SWITCH
Press "+" switch to increase the volume and"-" switch to decrease the volume.
SEEK SWITCH
Radio Operation
Short press : Next memory location
Long press : Seek tune upwards
Cassette Operation (Logic Deck Only)
S-CPS forwards
CD operation
S-CPS forwards
CD Changer Operation
Short press : Next CD
Long press : Next track
→ Radio → Cassette → CD (CD changer) ⎯
EMERGENCIES 5–1
• SPARE TYRE, JACK AND VEHICLE TOOLS ........... 5-2
• HOW TO CHANGE A FLAT TYRE ........................ 5-3
• STARTING THE ENGINE WITH JUMPER CABLES ...... 5-7
EMERGENCIES
• TOWING THE VEHICLE ........................................ 5-9
• ROCKING YOUR VEHICLE .................................. 5-11
• OVERHEATING ................................................... 5-12
5
5–2 EMERGENCIES
WARNING
Always store jack, spare tyre, other toolsand equipment securely in their properlocation.
• Do not store jack, spare tyre, or otherequipment in passenger compart-ment.
In sudden stop or collision, loose equip-ment can be thrown around inside yourvehicle and cause personal injuries.
SPARE TYRE, JACK ANDVEHICLE TOOLSYour spare tyre, jack and tools are securedin the luggage compartment.
Secure the spare tyre under the floor cover.
Store the jack and the tools in the storageof the luggage compartment. Be sure tosecure these tools and equipments, as youfound them.
See “WHEELS AND TYRES” in the indexfor more information.
NOTE
To eliminate the possibility of the jack,jack handle and tools rattling while thecar is moving, stow them securely underthe floor covering.
N4W5011A N5W5001A
Removing the spare tyre and tools(Wagon only)
1. Fold the floor cover by pulling thehandle upward.
2. Lift the floor tray.
3. Release the prop from its retainer andput the prop into the slot.
EMERGENCIES 5–3
WARNING
We designed the jack for use on yourvehicle only.
• Do not use jack provided with yourvehicle on other vehicles.
• Never exceed the jack’s maximumpermissible load.
Use of this jack on other vehicles maydamage the other vehicles or your jackand lead to personal injury.
1540 lbs(700 kg)
Lithium
1 National LubricatingGrease Institute (NLGI)
MaximumWorking Load
Grease Type
Grease Class
Jack specification
N5W5002A
4. Remove the spare tyre.
5. To access the tools, pull the strap on thetool box cover upward.
HOW TO CHANGE A FLAT TYREIf a tyre goes flat, observe following safetyinstruction before you change the tyre.
Tyre change safety precautions
1. Turn on the hazard warning light.
2. Pull off the road to a safe place awayfrom traffic.
3. Park on a firm and level surface. See“PARKING YOUR VEHICLE” in theindex.
4. Turn off engine and remove key.
5. Set handbrake.
6. Have all passengers get out of vehicleand stand in a safe place.
7. Use a wedge, block of wood, or rocksin front of and behind the tyre that isdiagonal from the tyre you plan tochange.
Failure to follow these safety precautionscan cause your vehicle to slip off the jackpossibly causing serious injury.
5–4 EMERGENCIES
S3W5023A
8. Raise vehicle by rotating jack handleclockwise until lifting head fits firmlyinto appropriate notch and tyre is offthe ground about 1 inch (3 cm).
CAUTION
• As the jack begins to raise the vehicle,make sure jack is properly placed soit will not slip.
NOTE
Do not raise vehicle more than is neces-sary to change wheel.
Jack handle
JackWheel wrench
4. Insert the jack handle and the wheelwrench into the jack.
5. Rotate the jack handle clockwise to raisethe lift head slightly.
6. Locate the jack according to the fig. be-low. There is a notch at the front andrear of the vehicle under the doors.
7. Place the jack vertically at the front orthe rear jacking notch next to the wheelyou plan to change.
CAUTION
Do not attempt to raise vehicle until thejack is in the proper position, and secureboth to the vehicle and the ground.
N4W5022A
2
14 3
S3W5021A
How to change a flat tyre
1. Remove the jack, tyre changing toolsand spare tyre from the storage in theluggage compartment.
2. Use the supplied wheel wrench or flathead screwdriver to pry off the wheelcover. (if so equipped.)
3. Use the wheel wrench to loosen thewheel nuts or bolts by one turn each.
CAUTION
Do not remove any of the nuts or boltsuntil you have raised the wheel off theground.
Loosen
EMERGENCIES 5–5
2
14 3
S3W5024A
WARNING
• Never get under car or start or runthe engine while car is supported bya jack.
Vehicle may slip off the jack resulting inserious injury or death.
9. Remove wheel nuts or bolts completelyby turning counterclockwise.
10. Remove tyre and wheel.
11. Mount spare tyre on the wheel hub.
CAUTION
• Never use oil or grease on wheel nutsor bolts.
• Always use correct wheel nuts or bolts.• Using the wheel lug wrench in the ve-
hicle tool kit, tighten the lug nuts orbolts down firmly.
• As soon as possible, take your car toa workshop and have the wheel nutsor bolts tightened according to speci-fications. We recommend yourauthorised Chevrolet repairer.
If tightened incorrectly, the nuts or boltsmight come loose.
12. Replace and lightly seat the wheel nutsor bolts by turning clockwise.
13. Turn jack handle counterclockwise andlower vehicle to the ground.
14. Tighten wheel nuts or bolts firmly to88 lb-ft (120 Nm) in a “X” pattern;1→2→3→4 (See fig. below)
WARNING
Make sure to use the proper nuts orbolts tightened to the correct torque.
Using incorrect parts or improperlytightened wheel nuts or bolts can causeor come off the vehicle.
Tighten
5–6 EMERGENCIES
CAUTION
(Continued)• Before jacking, ensure handbrake is
on and the transaxle is set in 1st orreverse gear (M/T) or P (A/T).
• Do not jack the vehicle and change thewheel where traffic is close.
CAUTION
Call a garage or motoring service forassistance where conditions are not sat-isfactory for jacking the car or if you arenot confident of completing the tasksafely.
CAUTION
When using the jack, the vehicle couldbecome unstable and move, damagingthe vehicle and causing personal injury.
• Use jack supplied at correct jackingposition.
• When installing the jack for lifting thevehicle, it should be perpendicular tothe ground.
• Do not go under a jacked-up vehicle.• Do not start vehicle while jacked-up.• Before jacking, get all passengers out
of the vehicle and clear of vehicle andother traffic.
• Use jack only for changing wheels.• Do not jack vehicle on an inclined or
slippery surface.• Use jacking position nearest to the
wheel requiring changing.• Block wheel diagonally opposite the
wheel to be changed.
(Continued)
15. Secure the wheel cover in the luggagecompartment until you have replaced thetemporary spare tyre with a regular tyre.
16. Secure the jack, tools, and the flat tyrein their proper locations.
WARNING
Do not store the jack and tools in thepassenger compartment.
In a sudden stop or collision, looseequipment can be thrown around thevehicle and cause personal injuries.
NOTE
The compact spare tyre is for short termuse only.Replace the spare with a regular tyre assoon as possible.
CAUTION
Do not put the wheel cover on the tem-porary spare tyre.The cover or wheel could be damaged.
EMERGENCIES 5–7
WARNING
(Continued)• Do not allow cable terminals to touch
each other.• Wear eye protection when working
near any battery.• Do not allow battery fluid to contact
eyes, skin, fabric, or painted surfaces.• Make sure battery providing jump
start has the same voltage as the bat-tery receiving the jump.
• Do not disconnect discharged batteryfrom vehicle.
Failure to follow these precautions orthe following instructions for startingan engine with jumper cables can causebattery to explode, resulting in burnsfrom battery acid, or electrical short cir-cuit.
This can create damage to electrical sys-tems in both vehicles, and cause seriouspersonal injury.
CAUTION
• Do not try to start vehicle by pushingor pulling it.
This can damage catalytic converter andautomatic transaxle, and may cause per-sonal injury.
STARTING THE ENGINE WITHJUMPER CABLES
You can start vehicle that has a dischargedbattery by transferring electrical power toit from a battery in another vehicle.
WARNING
Batteries can explode. You could beburnt by battery acid and electricalshort could injure you or damage thevehicles.
• Do not expose battery to flames orsparks.
• Do not lean over battery while jumpstarting vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING
• Always route jumper cables so theycannot catch on rotating parts in theengine compartment.
Otherwise you may damage vehicle andcause serious injury.
Before jump starting
1. Apply handbrake.
2. For a vehicle with automatic transaxle,shift to PARK, and for manualtransaxle, shift to NEUTRAL.
3. Switch off all electrical accessories.
CAUTION
• Turn audio system off before jumpstarting your vehicle. Otherwise youmay damage audio system.
5–8 EMERGENCIES
NOTE
Attempts to start the engine of the ve-hicle with the discharged battery shouldbe made at intervals of about one minuteand should not last longer than 15 sec-onds each.
4. Make the last connection to a suitableground, such as a steel bracket boltedto the engine block.
5. The engine of the vehicle providing thejump start can be allowed to run dur-ing the jump start.
Attaching jumper cables
To jump start your vehicle, connect thejumper cables in the following order:
1. Connect one clamp of the first lead ofthe jumper cable to the positive termi-nal of the charged battery. (identified bya “+” sign on the battery case or termi-nal)
2. Connect the other end of this same jumpercable lead to the positive terminal of thedischarged battery. (the “+” terminal)
3. Connect one end of the second lead onjumper cable to the negative terminal ofthe charged battery. (identified by a “–”sign on the battery case or terminal)
WARNING
Last connection to the vehicle to becharged should NOT be made to thenegative (–) battery terminal.
• Attach the clamp for this last connec-tion to a steel bracket bolted to theengine block.
• This last connection should be as faraway from the battery as possible.
Connecting the jumper cable to the nega-tive terminal of the discharged batterycould result in arcing and possibly abattery explosion.
Serious personal injury or vehicle dam-age can result.
N6W5001P
EMERGENCIES 5–9
WARNING
• Never let passengers ride in a vehiclethat is being towed.
• Never tow a vehicle faster than safeor posted speeds.
• Never tow a vehicle with damagedparts that are not fully secured on thevehicle.
Failure to observe these precautions canresult in personal injury.
TOWING THE VEHICLEIf it is necessary to tow your vehicle, con-tact a workshop or a professional tow truckservice. We recommend your authorisedChevrolet repairer.
Once the previously discharged vehicle isrunning:
1. Carefully disconnect the ground connec-tion (-). Begin with the vehicle with thedischarged battery. Leave the dischargedvehicle running.
2. Disconnect the negative lead from vehicleproviding the jump.
3. Disconnect the “+” lead from both bat-teries. Store the jumper cables with thespare tyre.
4. Operate the discharged vehicle for ap-proximately 20 minutes. This will allowthe charging system to recharge yourbattery.
5. If this discharge condition recurs, con-sult a workshop. We recommend yourauthorised Chevrolet repairer.
N4W5041A
Towing your vehicle with a wheel lift
1. Turn hazard flashers on.2. Turn ignition switch to ACC.3. Shift either automatic or manual
transaxle to NEUTRAL.4. Release handbrake.
CAUTION
If your vehicle must be towed from therear, use a towing dolly under the frontwheels.• Never tow your vehicle from the rear
with the front wheels on the road.Towing your vehicle with the frontwheels on the road can cause severedamage to your vehicle transaxle.
N4W5042A
5–10 EMERGENCIES
N5D5005A
Also the wheels, axles, drive train, steeringand brakes must be all in a good condition.
CAUTION
When towing the vehicle with a tow rope,the vehicle can be damaged.
To reduce damage:• Use towing eyes only if no other tow-
ing equipment is available.• Only tow the vehicle from the front.• Keep tow rope clear of bumper.• Ensure tow rope is securely fixed to
towing eyes, at both ends. Check bypulling on tow rope.
• Towing with a tow rope could causesevere automatic transaxle damage.When towing vehicle with automatictransaxle, use flat bed or wheel liftequipment.
• Drive off slowly and avoid jerkymovements.
5. Tow the vehicle with the front wheels offthe road.
CAUTION
• Do not use sling-type equipment totow the vehicle.
• Use flat bed or wheel lift equipment.
EMERGENCY TOWING
If towing service is not available in an emer-gency, your vehicle may be temporarilytowed by a cable secured to one of theemergency towing eyes under the vehicle.
Front Towing Eyes
The front towing eyes are provided underthe front bumper. A driver must be in thevehicle to steer it and operate the brakes.
Towing in this manner may be done onlyon hard-surfaced road for a short distanceand at low speeds.
N4W5043A
EMERGENCIES 5–11
N5D5006A
WARNING
When towing with a tow rope, controlof towed vehicle can be lost.
• Do not tow if the wheels, transaxle,axles, steering or brakes are dam-aged.
• Do not remove the key from the ig-nition switch as this will lock thesteering and this will make the vehicleundriveable.
Rear Towing Hook
When towing another vehicle, use the reartowing hook. It should be used only in anemergency situation. (for example, to pullthe vehicle out of a ditch, a snow bank, ormud.)
When the rear towing hook is used, alwayspull the cable or chain in a straight direc-tion with respect to the hook. Do not ap-ply force to the hook from any side direc-tion. To prevent damage, do not take upslack in the cable too quickly.
ROCKING YOUR VEHICLEIf stuck in snow, mud or other loose sur-faces, the procedure below may allow youto free your vehicle.1. Turn the steering wheel fully left then
right. This will clear the area aroundyour front tyres.
2. Shift back and forth between R and aforward gear.
3. Spin the wheels as little as possible.4. Release the accelerator pedal while you
shift.5. Press lightly on the accelerator pedal
when the transaxle is in gear.If that doesn’t release your vehicle after afew tries, your vehicle may need to betowed. Refer to “TOWING THEVEHICLE” earlier in this section.
N4G5061Q
5–12 EMERGENCIES
WARNING
If you rock your vehicle to make it outwhen it becomes stuck in snow, mud,sand, or etc.;• First check that there is no physical
object or people around the vehicle.During operation, the vehicle may sud-denly move forward or backward, caus-ing injury or damage to nearby peopleor objects.
NOTE
If you rock your vehicle, observe thefollowing precautions to prevent dam-age to the transaxle and other parts;• Do not depress the accelerator pedal
while shifting or before the transaxleis completely shifted to forward orreverse.
• Do not race the engine and avoid spin-ning the wheels.
• If your vehicle remains stuck afterrocking the vehicle several times, con-sider other ways such as towing.
OVERHEATINGIf the engine coolant temperature gaugeindicates the engine is overheating, or if youhave any other reason to suspect the en-gine may be overheating:
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Turn off the air conditioning.
3. Let the engine idle for a few minutes.
4. Be sure the cooling fan is operating.
WARNING
If steam is visible, move away from ve-hicle until engine is cool. Steam can causeserious burns.
NOTE
Using A/C while driving up long hills orin heavy traffic can cause the engine over-heating.
EMERGENCIES 5–13
If the coolant level is low, check for leaksfor following components:
1. Radiator.
2. Radiator hoses.
3. Radiator connections.
4. Heater hoses.
5. Heater hose connections.
6. Water pump.
If you find a leak or other damage, or ifthe coolant is still leaking, consult a work-shop immediately. We recommend yourauthorised Chevrolet repairer. Do not drivethe vehicle until these problems have beensolved.
WARNING
Scalding hot coolant steam could beblown out under pressure, which couldcause serious injury.• Never remove the coolant reservoir
cap when engine and radiator arehot.
If the fan is not operating and steam is vis-ible, perform the following:
1. Turn off engine.
2. Move away from vehicle without open-ing the bonnet.
3. Allow engine to cool.
4. When steam is no longer visible, care-fully open bonnet.
5. Consult a workshop as soon as pos-sible. We recommend your authorisedChevrolet repairer.
If the fan is operating and steam is not vis-ible, perform the following:
1. Carefully open the bonnet.
2. Idle engine until cool.
3. Check coolant level.
If the fan is operating, but engine tempera-ture does not fall, perform the following:
1. Stop the engine.
2. Carefully open the bonnet.
3. Allow the engine to cool.
4. Check the coolant level.
SERVICE AND VEHICLE CARE 6–1
SERVICE AND VEHICLE CARE6• SAFETY PRECAUTIONS......................................... 6-2
• DRIVER’S CHECK LIST ........................................... 6-4
• ENGINE COMPARTMENT ..................................... 6-5
• ENGINE OIL .......................................................... 6-8
• COOLANT .......................................................... 6-12
• BRAKE AND CLUTCH FLUID .............................. 6-14
• DIESEL FUEL FILTER ............................................ 6-16
• MANUAL TRANSAXLE FLUID ............................. 6-17
• AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE FLUID ....................... 6-19
• POWER STEERING FLUID ................................... 6-26
• WINDSCREEN WASHER FLUID ........................... 6-27
• WINDSCREEN WIPERS ........................................ 6-28
• DIESEL PARTICULATE FILTER (DPF) .................... 6-28
• AIR CLEANER ...................................................... 6-30
• SPARK PLUGS ..................................................... 6-31
• DRIVE BELT ......................................................... 6-32
• BATTERY ............................................................. 6-33
• BRAKE PEDAL ..................................................... 6-35
• CLUTCH PEDAL .................................................. 6-35
• HANDBRAKE ....................................................... 6-36
• CATALYTIC CONVERTER .................................... 6-36
• WHEELS AND TYRES .......................................... 6-37
• AIR CONDITIONER FILTER ................................. 6-41
• FUSES .................................................................. 6-42
• LAMPS ................................................................ 6-47
• VEHICLE CARE .................................................... 6-55
6–2 SERVICE AND VEHICLE CARE
S3W6011A
WARNING
• Turn ignition OFF and remove thekey from the ignition before check-ing or working under hood.
Touching live parts while ignition is ONcan result in shock or burns.
SAFETY PRECAUTIONSWhen performing any inspection or main-tenance work on your vehicle, take precau-tions to reduce the risk of personal injuryor damage.
General precautions to observe when per-forming vehicle service:
• Do not work on the engine while it ishot.
• Make sure there is proper ventilationwhenever you have the engine runningin an enclosed space such as a garage.
• Keep used oil, coolant, and other fluidsout of reach of children and pets.
• Do not dispose of empty oil and fluidcontainers, or those containing used oilor fluid, with your household waste.Use only locally authorised automotivewaste disposal facilities.
• Never connect or disconnect the batteryor any transistorized components whilethe ignition switch is ON.
• When connecting the battery cables, payspecial attention to their polarities. Neverconnect a positive cable to a negative ter-minal, or a negative cable to a positiveterminal.
• Remember that the battery, ignitioncables, and your vehicle wiring carryhigh current or voltage. Be careful notto cause a short circuit.
WARNING
If you must reach into the engine com-partment, remove loose clothing andjewellery that can become caught, andavoid placing body parts near the fan,belts, or other moving parts.
WARNING
The catalytic converter and other ex-haust components while engine is run-ning can get very hot.
Touching the related parts while engineis running can result in severe burns.
• Never get under the vehicle while it issupported by a jack. If it is necessary towork under the vehicle, use safetystands.
• Keep smoking materials, flames, andsparks away from the battery, all fuel,and fuel-related parts.
SERVICE AND VEHICLE CARE 6–3
• If it is necessary to check under the hoodwhile the engine is running, take care toavoid unexpected and sudden move-ments of your vehicle. With an automatictransaxle, place selector lever in PARKor NEUTRAL and apply handbrake.For a manual transaxle, place the shiftlever in neutral and apply the handbrakefirmly.
• To avoid the possibility of personal in-jury, always turn the ignition off andremove the key before working underthe hood, unless the procedure specifi-cally requires to do so. If the procedurerequires you to work under the hoodwhile the engine is running, removeloose clothing and jewellery that can be-come caught in moving parts and causepersonal injury.
CAUTION
The electric cooling fans (in the enginecompartment) are controlled by sensors.These fans may come on at any time.
• It is important to keep hands, fingers,and any loose articles clear of the fanblades.
Engine compartment cooling fan
WARNING
Touching live parts of your vehicle whenthe ignition is ON is highly dangerous.
• Make sure you turn the ignition offand remove the key before you makeany engine checks or perform othermaintenance under the hood.
It can result in burns, shocks, or otherpersonal injuries.
To avoid possible injury from the coolingfan, switch off the engine so the fan is notoperating before you perform any enginechecks.
Also, be aware that the electronic ignitionsystem has a higher voltage than conven-tional systems. Therefore, it is highly dan-gerous to touch live parts when yourvehicle’s ignition is ON.
6–4 SERVICE AND VEHICLE CARE
DRIVER’S CHECK LISTTo maintain safe and dependable operationof your vehicle, periodically check the exte-rior, interior, and engine compartment.
EXTERIOR
Tyres
• Correctly inflated. (See “WHEELS ANDTYRES” in the index)
• No cracks on sidewall or tread.
• No foreign objects in tread.
Wheels
• Nuts and bolts are tightened to the cor-rect torque figure. (See “HOW TOCHANGE A FLAT TYRE” in the index)
Lamps
• Operation of all running, head, tail, sidemarkers, turn signals, brake and foglamps.
Fluids
• Check the correct fill level of all fluid res-ervoirs under hood.
Windscreen wipers
• Inspect condition of arms and rubberinserts (including rear wiper if soequipped.).
INTERIOR
Steering
• Check for excessive looseness (free play)in steering wheel.
Handbrake
• Make sure handbrake lever travel isappropriate.
Instrument panel
• Check correct operations of all instru-ment panel gauges, controls, and warn-ing lamps.
Mirrors
• Be sure the reflective surface of all threemirrors is in good condition and clean.
• Check for ability to easily re-adjust allmirrors.
Controls
• Check for play on brake and clutchpedals.
SERVICE AND VEHICLE CARE 6–5
ENGINE COMPARTMENT1.4 DOHC/1.6 DOHC MODEL
1. Air cleaner
2. Engine oil filler cap
3. Brake / clutch fluid reservoir
4. Coolant reservoir
5. Fuse and relay box
6. Battery
7. Washer fluid reservoir
8. Power steering fluid reservoir
9. Engine oil level dipstick
10. Automatic transaxle fluid level dip-stick*
N4G6031Q
6–6 SERVICE AND VEHICLE CARE
1.8 DOHC MODEL
1. Air cleaner
2. Engine oil filler cap
3. Brake / clutch fluid reservoir
4. Coolant reservoir
5. Fuse and relay box
6. Battery
7. Washer fluid reservoir
8. Power steering fluid reservoir
9. Engine oil level dipstick
N6W6001P
SERVICE AND VEHICLE CARE 6–7
N7W6001A
1. Air cleaner
2. Engine oil filler cap
3. Brake / clutch fluid reservoir
4. Coolant reservoir
5. Fuse and relay box
6. Battery
7. Washer fluid reservoir
8. Power steering fluid reservoir
9. Engine oil level dipstick
10. Auxiliary fuse and relay box
11. Fuel filter
2.0S DIESEL MODEL
6–8 SERVICE AND VEHICLE CARE
N7W6052A
6. Check the oil on the dipstick to makesure it is not contaminated.
7. Check oil level, as shown on the dip-stick. Oil should be between MIN andMAX.
ENGINE OILKeep your engine properly lubricated bykeeping the engine oil at the correct level.
It is normal for an engine to consume someengine oil.
Check the oil level at regular intervals suchas every time you stop for fuel.
If the engine oil pressure warning lamp( ) on the instrument panel comes on,you need to check your engine oil level rightaway.
CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL
1. Park vehicle on level ground.
2. After stopping engine, wait a few min-utes to allow oil to drain back into oilpan, If engine is cold, oil will take longerto drain into the pan.
3. Pull out the dipstick and wipe it clean.
4. Re-insert dipstick completely.
5. Pull the dipstick out again.
Proper oil level
N6W6002A
(Gasoline)
(Diesel)
SERVICE AND VEHICLE CARE 6–9
N6W6003A
8. If the oil level is below MIN, add enoughoil of the same grade as is currently inthe engine to raise the oil level to MAX.Do not fill over MAX mark.
The engine oil filler cap is located on thecylinder head cover as shown in the il-lustration below.
See “FLUID CHART” in the index foroil specification.
WARNING
Adding too much oil can affect engineoperation.
• Do not allow oil to go above MAXmark on dipstick.
Overfilling reservoir can damage yourvehicle by:
• Increasing oil consumption.• Fouling spark plugs.• Building excessive carbon deposits in
the engine.
WARNING
Engine oil is an irritant and, if ingested,can cause illness or death.
• Keep out of reach of children.• Avoid repeated or prolonged contact
with skin.• Wash exposed areas with soap and
water or hand cleaner.
CHANGING ENGINE OIL AND FILTER
Engine oil looses its ability to lubricate whencontaminated. Be sure to change your en-gine oil according to maintenance schedule.
Be sure to replace the engine oil filter eachtime you change engine oil.
Under severe conditions, change oil and oilfilter more frequently than is recommendedin the standard maintenance schedule.
WARNING
This work requires special skill, toolsand equipments to be completed.
Before attempting to do the work, besure you are fully acquainted with do-ing this job.• Have a workshop do this work if
you are not confident of completingthe task safely.
Otherwise, you could be injured ordamage the vehicle. We recommend thatyou consult your authorised Chevroletrepairer.
Oil filler cap
6–10 SERVICE AND VEHICLE CARE
CAUTION
• Do not dispose of used engine oil andfilter with your household waste.
• Use your local, authorised waste man-agement facility.
Used engine oil and filter contain harm-ful elements that may be unhealthy toyou and threat to the environment.
CAUTION
Use of unauthorised or low quality en-gine oil or chemical engine treatments(additives) can damage the engine.
• Consult a workshop before attempt-ing to use additives. We recommendthat you consult your authorisedChevrolet repairer.
WARNING
Engine oil and its containers can be haz-ardous to your health.
• Avoid repeated or prolonged contactwith engine oil.
• Clean your skin and nails with soapand water, or hand cleaner after han-dling engine oil. Also keep this andother toxic materials out of the reachof children.
Engine oil can irritate the skin and cancause illness and even death if swal-lowed.
Severe conditions include, but are notlimited to:
• Frequent cold starts.
• Considerable travel in stop-and-gotraffic.
• Frequent short trips.
• Frequent driving when outside tempera-ture remains below freezing.
• Prolonged idling.
• Frequent low-speed driving.
• Driving in dusty areas.
SERVICE AND VEHICLE CARE 6–11
RECOMMENDED ENGINE OIL ANDMAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
Recommended engine oil
See “FLUID CHART” in the index for rec-ommended engine oil and capacity.
Maintenance schedule
See “SCHEDULED MAINTENANCESERVICES” in the service guide.
ENGINE OIL LIFE SYSTEM*(Diesel only)
Your vehicle may have an engine oil lifesystem that lets you know when to changethe engine oil. Based on driving conditions,the mileage at which an oil change will beindicated can vary considerably. For the oillife system to work properly, you must re-set the system every time the oil is changed.
When the system has calculated that oil lifehas been diminished, it will indicate that anoil change is necessary. The change engineoil lamp will come on in the instrument clus-ter. See “CHANGE ENGINE OIL LAMP”.Change your oil as soon as possible. In thediesel-engined vehicle, the engine power canbe decreased. Change the engine oil imme-diately if the change engine oil lamp comeson in the diesel-engined vehicle. It is pos-sible that, if you are driving under the bestconditions, the oil life system may not indi-cate that an oil change is necessary for overa year. However, your engine oil and filtermust be changed at least once a year and
at this time the system must be reset. Yourdealer has Chevrolet-trained service peoplewho will perform this work using the scantool and reset the system. It is also impor-tant to check the oil regularly and keep itat the correct level.
How to Reset the Engine Oil Life System
The engine oil life system calculates whento change your engine oil and filter basedon vehicle use. Anytime your oil is changed,reset the system so it can calculate when thenext oil change is required.
To reset the engine oil life system, do oneof the following:
• Using the scan tool
Your authorised repairer will reset thesystem using scan tool after changing theengine oil. Consult a workshop. We rec-ommend your Chevrolet authorised re-pairer.
• Using accelerator pedal
6–12 SERVICE AND VEHICLE CARE
COOLANT
N4W6081B
In the correct mixture, this coolant pro-vides the cooling and heating system withexcellent protection against corrosion andfreezing.
When the engine is cool, the coolant levelshould be between the MIN and MAXmark on the coolant reservoir. The level ofcoolant rises as the engine warms anddrops back as the engine cools.
The cooling system in your vehicle is de-signed to use either Dex-cool coolant,which is red in colour, or silicate based cool-ant, which is blue. These two types of cool-ant are not compatible with each other andshould never be mixed. Therefore, if theoriginal coolant in your vehicle’s coolingsystem was red, then you should use onlyDex-cool coolant for the life of your vehicle.If the original coolant in your vehicle’s cool-ing system was blue, then you should useonly silicate based coolant for the life ofyour vehicle. Even if the cooling system hasbeen completely drained before a refill, donot switch types of coolant.
CAUTION
• Do not mix Dex-cool and silicatebased coolant in your coolant system.
The mixture can damage the coolingsystem.
CAUTION
Remember to reset the engine oil life sys-tem whenever the engine oil is changed.
1. Turn the ignition key to ON with theengine off.
2. Fully press and release the acceleratorpedal three times within five seconds.
3. Turn the key to LOCK.
If the change engine oil lamp comes backon and stays on when you start your ve-hicle, the engine oil life system has not re-set. Repeat the procedure.
SERVICE AND VEHICLE CARE 6–13
CAUTION
Coolant can be hazardous material.
• Avoid repeated or prolonged contactwith coolant.
• Clean your skin and nails with soapand water after coming in contactwith coolant.
• Keep out of reach of children.• Coolant can irritate the skin and can
cause illness or death if swallowed.
CAUTION
Plain water or the wrong mixture candamage the cooling system.
• Do not use plain water, alcohol ormethanol antifreeze in coolant system.
• Use only 56:44 mix of demineralisedwater and proper antifreeze specifiedfor use with your vehicle.
The engine may overheat or even catchfire.
If the coolant level falls below the MINmark, add the correct coolant mixture atthe coolant reservoir, but only when the en-gine is cool.
In order to protect your vehicle in ex-tremely cold weather, use mix of 48 percentwater and 52 percent antifreeze.
WARNING
Scalding hot coolant and steam couldbe blown out under pressure, whichcould cause serious injury.
• Never remove the coolant reservoircap when the engine and radiator arehot.
COOLANT CONCENTRATION
Antifreeze(%)
44%
52%
Water(%)
56%
48%
Climate
Average area
Extremelycold area
6–14 SERVICE AND VEHICLE CARE
BRAKE AND CLUTCH FLUIDYour vehicle has one reservoir for both thebrake and clutch fluid.Brake/clutch fluid can absorb moisture. Ex-cessive moisture in the fluid may reduce theeffectiveness of the hydraulic brake/clutchsystem. Change the fluid according to thismanual to prevent hydraulic system corro-sion.Use only brake/clutch fluid recommended byus. Keep reservoir filled to the proper level.Do not allow the level to fall below MINmark or to raise beyond the MAX mark.A low fluid level in the brake fluid reservoircan be either an indication of a leak in thebrake system or a normal indication causedby usual brake pad/lining wear. Consult aworkshop to determine if the system needsrepair and add fluid after work is done onyour hydraulic brake system if it is required.We recommend that you consult yourauthorised Chevrolet repairer.When your brake fluid drops to low level,the brake system warning lamp ( ) willcome on. See “BRAKE SYSTEM WARN-ING LAMP” in the index.
ADDING BRAKE/CLUTCH FLUID
1. Thoroughly wipe away dirt from aroundthe fluid reservoir cap.
CAUTION
• Make sure you thoroughly cleanaround the brake/clutch fluid reser-voir cap before removing the cap.
Contamination of the brake/clutch fluidsystem can affect system performance,leading to costly repairs.
N4G6081P
COOLANT SPECIFICATION ANDMAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
Coolant specification
See “FLUID CHART” in the index for rec-ommended coolant and capacity.
Maintenance schedule
See “SCHEDULED MAINTENANCESERVICES” in the service guide.
CAUTION
It is not needed to add coolant more fre-quently than the recommended interval.If you are adding coolant often, this maybe a sign that your engine needs mainte-nance.
Contact a workshop for a check of thecooling system. We recommend yourauthorised Chevrolet repairer.
SERVICE AND VEHICLE CARE 6–15
4. Reinstall the reservoir cap. RECOMMENDED BRAKE / CLUTCHFLUID AND MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
Recommended brake / clutch fluid
See “FLUID CHART” in the index forrecommended brake / clutch fluid andcapacity.
Maintenance schedule
See “SCHEDULED MAINTENANCESERVICES” in the service guide.
CAUTION
• Do not dispose of used brake/clutchfluid with your household waste.
• Use your local, authorised waste man-agement facility.
Used brake/clutch fluid and their con-tainers are hazardous. They can damageyour health and the environment.
CAUTION
Brake/ clutch fluid is harsh and can ir-ritate skin and eyes.
• Do not allow the brake/clutch fluid tocontact your skin or eyes. If it does,immediately wash the affected areathoroughly with soap and water, orhand cleaner.
CAUTION
An overflow of brake/clutch fluid on theengine may cause the fluid to burn.
• Do not overfill the reservoir.An engine fire can cause personal inju-ries and damage your vehicle and otherproperty.
2. Unscrew the filler cap.
3. Use the recommended brake/clutch fluidto fill the reservoir to the MAX mark.Be careful not to spill the fluid on paintedsurfaces. If this happens, use cold waterto wash the affected area immediately.
6–16 SERVICE AND VEHICLE CARE
DIESEL FUEL FILTER(DIESEL ONLY)*HOW TO DRAIN THE WATER FROMTHE FUEL FILTER
If water in fuel gets into the engine and fuelsystem, it may cause serious damage to thefuel system. When the water level in fuelfilter exceeds a certain level, water in fuelwarning lamp comes on. If it occurs, im-mediately drain the water from fuel filter.
CAUTION
Before attempting to do the drainingwork, be sure you are fully acquaintedwith doing this job.
• Have a workshop do this work if youare not confident of completing thetask safely. We recommend yourauthorised Chevrolet repairer.
N7W6033P
1. Locate the fuel filter in the engine com-partment and place a water containerunder it.
2. Turn the drain plug counterclockwiselocated in the left area of the fuel filterusing a flat-blade screwdriver.
3. Wait until the water gets out from theport completely, then turn the drain plugclockwise to tighten it.
4. Before starting the engine, perform thepriming operation as the following:Turn the ignition key to ON, wait forabout 5 seconds and turn the key toLOCK. This operation should be per-formed more than 3 times with the en-gine off.
When to perform the priming operation
• If the vehicle has been run out of fuel
• After draining water from the fuel filter
• After replacing the fuel filter
CAUTION
• The fuel system in the engine may getserious damage if you keep drivingwhile the warning lamp is coming on.Prompt correction should be neces-sary.
• If the priming operation is not prop-erly performed, air may get into thefuel line. It may cause a starting prob-lem or fuel system problem. Makesure to perform the job.
SERVICE AND VEHICLE CARE 6–17
3. Remove filler plug.
4. Make sure the fluid reaches the bottomedge of the filler plug hole.
CAUTION
Heat from engine, transaxle or fluid cancause severe burns.
• Make sure the transaxle is cool to thetouch before you attempt this proce-dure.
Working on the engine before it hascooled properly can result in personalinjuries.
CAUTION
Too much fluid will decrease vehicle per-formance.
• Do not overfill the manual transaxlefluid.
This can damage the transaxle.
7. Visually check the transaxle case forleaks or damage.
5. If the level is low, add fluid until it be-gins to run out the filler hole.
6. After filling to the correct level, reinstallthe plug securely.
N4W6131A
1. Turn the engine off.
2. Allow the transaxle to cool. It must becool enough for you to rest your fingerson the transaxle case.
MANUAL TRANSAXLE FLUID(GASOLINE)*CHECKING MANUAL TRANSAXLE FLUIDLEVEL
WARNING
This work requires special skill andequipments to be completed.
Before attempting to do the work, besure you are fully acquainted with do-ing this job.
• Have a workshop do this work ifyou are not confident of completingthe task safely.
Otherwise, you could be injured ordamage the vehicle. We recommend thatyou consult your authorised Chevroletrepairer.
6–18 SERVICE AND VEHICLE CARE
L7W6004A
RECOMMENDED MANUAL TRANSAXLEFLUID AND MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
Recommended manual transaxle fluid
See “FLUID CHART” in the index for rec-ommended manual transaxle fluid and ca-pacity.
Maintenance schedule
See “SCHEDULED MAINTENANCESERVICES” in the service guide.
It is not necessary to check the fluid levelunless the fluid has been changed or a leakis suspected.
1. Turn the engine off.
2. Allow the transaxle to cool. It must becool enough for you to rest your fingerson the transaxle case.
MANUAL TRANSAXLE FLUID(DIESEL)*CHECKING MANUAL TRANSAXLE FLUIDLEVEL
WARNING
This work requires special skill andequipments to be completed.
Before attempting to do the work, besure you are fully acquainted with do-ing this job.
• Have a workshop do this work ifyou are not confident of completingthe task safely. We recommend yourauthorised Chevrolet repairer.
Otherwise, you could be injured ordamage the vehicle.
3. Remove filler plug.
4. Make sure the fluid reaches the bottomedge of the filler plug hole.
CAUTION
Heat from engine, transaxle or fluid cancause severe burns.
• Make sure the transaxle is cool to thetouch before you attempt this proce-dure.
Working on the engine before it hascooled properly can result in personalinjuries.
SERVICE AND VEHICLE CARE 6–19
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLEFLUID*(1.6 DOHC model - AISIN 81-40LEAutomatic Transaxle)
To ensure correct functioning, efficiency,and durability of the automatic transaxle,be sure to keep the transaxle fluid at thecorrect level. Too much or too little fluid cancause problems.
The fluid level must be checked with theengine running and the selector lever inP(Park). The vehicle must be up to normaloperating temperature and parked on levelground.
The normal operating temperature forthe fluid (70°C ~ 80°C (158°F ~ 176°F))will be reached after driving about 20 km(12.4 miles).
RECOMMENDED MANUAL TRANSAXLEFLUID AND MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
Recommended manual transaxle fluid
See “FLUID CHART” in the index for rec-ommended manual transaxle fluid and ca-pacity.
Maintenance schedule
See “SCHEDULED MAINTENANCESERVICES” in the service guide.
CAUTION
Too much fluid will decrease vehicle per-formance.
• Do not overfill the manual transaxlefluid.
This can damage the transaxle.
7. Visually check the transaxle case forleaks or damage.
5. If the level is low, add fluid until it be-gins to run out the filler hole.
6. After filling to the correct level, reinstallthe plug securely.
6–20 SERVICE AND VEHICLE CARE
5. Re-insert the dipstick completely.
6. Pull the dipstick out again.
7. Check the oil on the dipstick to makesure it is not contaminated.
8. Check the oil level. Oil should be be-tween MIN and MAX mark of the hotarea on the dipstick as shown in the il-lustration.
9. If the oil level is below MIN of the hotarea, add enough ATF to raise the oillevel to MAX.
S3W6162A
Hotarea
Coolarea
1. Start the engine.
2. Warm up until the temperature of theautomatic transaxle fluid reaches ap-proximately 70°C ~ 80°C (158°F ~176°F).
3. Move the selector lever from “P” to “1”and return to “P”. Wait for seconds ateach select position until the selectedgears are fully engaged.
4. Pull out the dipstick and wipe it clean.
L3W6172A
CHECKING AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLEFLUID LEVEL
If the fluid is contaminated or discoloured,change the automatic transaxle fluid.
Decrease in the fluid level indicates leak inthe automatic transaxle. If noted, contact aworkshop for repair as soon as possible.We recommend your authorised Chevroletrepairer.
CAUTION
• Take care not to let dirt or foreignmaterials contaminate the transaxlefluid.
Contaminated fluid can cause a severemalfunction of the automatic transaxle,leading to costly repairs.
SERVICE AND VEHICLE CARE 6–21
NOTE
If you are adding more than 1.5L, thismay be a sign of leaks somewhere inyour transaxle.
Contact a workshop for a check of yourautomatic transaxle. We recommendyour authorised Chevrolet repairer.
CAUTION
Too much fluid will decrease vehicle per-formance.
• Do not overfill the automatictransaxle fluid.
This can damage the transaxle.
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLEFLUID*(1.8 DOHC model - ZF 4HP16Automatic Transaxle)
To ensure correct functioning, efficiency,and durability of the automatic transaxle,be sure to keep the transaxle fluid at thecorrect level. Too much or too little fluid cancause problems.
The fluid level must be checked with theengine running and the selector lever inP(Park). The vehicle must be up to normaloperating temperature and parked on levelground.
The normal operating temperature for thefluid will be reached after driving about10 minutes.
RECOMMENDED AUTOMATICTRANSAXLE FLUID AND MAINTENANCESCHEDULE
Recommended automatic transaxle fluid
See “FLUID CHART” in the index for rec-ommended automatic transaxle fluid andcapacity.
Maintenance schedule
See “SCHEDULED MAINTENANCESERVICES” in the service guide.
6–22 SERVICE AND VEHICLE CARE
CAUTION
Heat from engine, transaxle or fluid cancause severe burns.
• Be careful when you check the fluidlevel.
3. Move the selector lever from “P” to “1”and return to “P”. Wait for seconds ateach select position until the selectedgears are fully engaged.
4. Remove filler plug.
5. Make sure the fluid reaches the bottomedge of the filler plug hole.
6. If the level is low, add fluid until it be-gins to run out the filler hole.
NOTE
If you are adding more than 1.5L, thismay be a sign of leaks somewhere inyour transaxle.
Contact a workshop for a check of yourautomatic transaxle. We recommendyour authorised Chevrolet repairer.
L3W6171A
1. Start the engine.
2. Warm up until the temperature of theautomatic transaxle fluid reaches ap-proximately 40°C (104°F).
CAUTION
• Take care not to let dirt or foreignmaterials contaminate the transaxlefluid.
Contaminated fluid can cause a severemalfunction of the automatic transaxle,leading to costly repairs.
CHECKING AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLEFLUID LEVEL
If the fluid is contaminated or discoloured,change the automatic transaxle fluid.
Decrease in the fluid level indicates leak inthe automatic transaxle. If noted, contact aworkshop for repair as soon as possible.We recommend your authorised Chevroletrepairer.
WARNING
This work requires special skill andequipments to be completed.
Before attempting to do the work, besure you are fully acquainted with do-ing this job.
• Have a workshop do this work ifyou are not confident of completingthe task safely.
Otherwise, you could be injured ordamage the vehicle. We recommend thatyou consult your authorised Chevroletrepairer.
SERVICE AND VEHICLE CARE 6–23
CAUTION
Too much fluid will decrease vehicle per-formance.
• Do not overfill the automatictransaxle fluid.
This can damage the transaxle.
7. After filling to the correct level, reinstallthe plug securely.
RECOMMENDED AUTOMATICTRANSAXLE FLUID AND MAINTENANCESCHEDULE
Recommended automatic transaxle fluid
See “FLUID CHART” in the index for rec-ommended automatic transaxle fluid andcapacity.
Maintenance schedule
See “SCHEDULED MAINTENANCESERVICES” in the service guide.
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE FLUID(DIESEL)*To ensure proper functioning, efficiency,and durability of the automatic transaxle,be sure to keep the transaxle fluid at theproper level. Too much or too little fluidcan cause problems.
The fluid level must be checked with theengine running and the selector lever inP(Park). The vehicle must be up to normaloperating temperature and parked on levelground.
The normal operating temperature for thefluid will be reached after driving about10 minutes.
NOTE
The transaxle fluid change is not re-quired. Also, routine inspection of thefluid is not required. Transaxle fluid in-spection is only required if there is asymptom indicating a concern with thefluid.
6–24 SERVICE AND VEHICLE CARE
N7W6005C
3
4
CHECKING AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLEFLUID LEVEL
If the fluid is contaminated or discoloured,change the automatic transaxle fluid.
Decrease in the fluid level indicates leak inthe automatic transaxle. If noted, contact aworkshop for repair as soon as possible.We recommend your authorised Chevroletrepairer.
WARNING
This work requires special skill andequipments to be completed.
Before attempting to do the work, besure you are fully acquainted with do-ing this job.
• Have a workshop do this work ifyou are not confident of completingthe task safely.
Otherwise, you could be injured ordamage the vehicle. We recommend thatyou consult your authorised Chevroletrepairer.
1. Start the engine.
2. Warm up until the temperature of theautomatic transaxle fluid reachesapproximately 70°C ~ 80°C.
CAUTION
• Take care not to let dirt or foreignmaterials contaminate the transaxlefluid.
Contaminated fluid can cause a severemalfunction of the automatic transaxle,leading to costly repairs.
3. Manual shift through all transaxleranges and return to “P”. Wait for sec-onds at each select position until the se-lected gears are fully engaged.
4. Remove the transaxle fluid level indica-tor bolt and transaxle fluid level in-dicator
5. Wipe away any transaxle fluid from theindicator.
6. Insert the indicator into the transaxleuntil fully seated.
SERVICE AND VEHICLE CARE 6–25
8. If the fluid level is incorrect, inspect forthe following conditions:
• Fluid below level, inspect for a leak andadd the fluid through the fluid level in-dicator location.
• Fluid above level, transaxle is overfilled.
Drain some of the fluid through thedrain plug.Check the fluid level.
CAUTION
Too much fluid will decrease vehicle per-formance.
• Do not overfill the automatictransaxle fluid.
This can damage the transaxle.
CAUTION
Heat from engine, transaxle or fluid cancause severe burns.
• Be careful when you check the fluidlevel.
7. Remove the indicator and inspect thelevel and the condition of the fluid onthe indicator:
Transaxle fluid level at normal oper-ating temperature
Transaxle fluid level if cold
RECOMMENDED AUTOMATICTRANSAXLE FLUID AND MAINTENANCESCHEDULE
Recommended automatic transaxle fluid
See “FLUID CHART” in the index for rec-ommended automatic transaxle fluid andcapacity.
Maintenance schedule
See “SCHEDULED MAINTENANCESERVICES” in the service guide.
6–26 SERVICE AND VEHICLE CARE
ADDING POWER STEERING FLUID
1. Wipe the cap and the top of the reser-voir clean.
2. Unscrew the cap.
3. Add the power steering fluid. Be sure tomaintain the level between MIN andMAX mark.
4. Replace the cap.
CAUTION
An overflow of the fluid may cause thefluid to burn or discolour paintwork.
• Do not overfill the reservoir.An engine fire can cause personal inju-ries and damage your vehicle and otherproperty.
1. Turn the engine off.
2. Check the fluid level. It should be be-tween MIN and MAX on the reservoir.
If level drops to or below MIN, add fluidas specified in this manual.
POWER STEERING FLUIDCHECKING POWER STEERING FLUIDLEVEL
Regularly check power steering fluid level.
The power steering fluid reservoir is locatednext to the battery.
CAUTION
• Do not operate vehicle without therequired amount of power steeringfluid.
To do so can damage power steeringsystem of your vehicle, leading to costlyrepairs.
N4W6181B
SERVICE AND VEHICLE CARE 6–27
WINDSCREEN WASHER FLUIDBefore you drive, make sure the windscreenwasher fluid reservoir is at the appropriatelevel and filled with the correct solution.
In cold weather, do not fill the windscreenwasher fluid reservoir more than threequarters full.
Washer fluid can freeze to expand in coldtemperatures. Filling the reservoir too muchdoes not allow enough expansion room toprevent possible damage to the reservoir.
RECOMMENDED POWER STEERINGFLUID AND MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
Recommended power steering fluid
See “FLUID CHART” in the index forrecommended power steering fluid andcapacity.
Maintenance schedule
See “SCHEDULED MAINTENANCESERVICES” in the service guide.
N4W6211A
NOTE
To refill windscreen washer fluid reser-voir:
• Use only commercially available ready-to-use washer fluid for that purpose.
• Do not use tap water. Minerals presentin tap water may plug the windscreenwasher lines.
• If air temperature is likely to go be-low freezing, use windscreen washerfluid which has sufficient anti-freezingproperty.
CAUTION
• Do not put water or radiator anti-freeze in windscreen washer reservoir.
Water can allow solution to freeze. Fro-zen solution can damage windscreenwasher system.
Radiator antifreeze can damage wind-screen washer system and vehicle paint.
6–28 SERVICE AND VEHICLE CARE
S3W6231A
REPLACING WIPER BLADES
1. Press and hold the wiper blade retain-ing clip.
2. Pull the wiper blade off the wiper arm.
3. Install a new wiper blade onto the arm.
WINDSCREEN WIPERSProperly functioning windscreen wipers areessential for clear vision and safe driving.Regularly check the condition of the wiperblades. Replace hard, brittle or crackedblades or those that smear dirt on thewindscreen.
Foreign material on the windscreen orwiper blades can reduce the effectiveness ofthe wipers. If the blades are not wipingproperly, clean both the windscreen and theblades with a good cleaner or mild deter-gent. Rinse them thoroughly with water.Repeat the process, if necessary.
There is no way to remove traces of siliconefrom glass. Therefore, never apply polishwith silicone to your vehicle’s windscreen oryou will get streaks which will impair thedriver’s vision.
Do not use solvents, gasoline, kerosene, orpaint thinner to clean wipers. These areharsh and can damage the blades andpainted surfaces.
Retaining clip
C7E6027A
1
2
3
4
DIESEL PARTICULATE FILTER(DPF)*The diesel aftertreatment system consists ofa pre-catalytic converter (Precat) and a cata-lytic converter (main diesel oxidation cata-lyst + coated diesel particulate filter) de-signed to reduce exhaust emissions such ashydrocarbons (HC), carbon monoxide(CO) and particulates to meet the emissionregulation.
1. Main diesel oxidation catalyst
2. Coated diesel particulate filter
3. Pressure pipes
4. Pre-catalyst (Precat)
SERVICE AND VEHICLE CARE 6–29
The DPF is made from silicon carbide (SiC)and is coated with noble metal. It is designedto reduce hydrocarbons (HC) and carbonmonoxide (CO) emissions and to collectparticulates from the engine exhaust tominimise discharge of soot to the atmo-sphere. The soot particles accumulate in thechannels of the coated diesel filter and areburnt off at regular interval (through aprocess called "regeneration") to preventfilter clogging. See ”DIESEL PARTICU-LATE FILTER (DPF) indicator” in the sec-tion 2 for more information. Excess sootin the filter can cause a drop in engine per-formance and crack the filter during regen-eration. The Malfunction Indicator Lamp(MIL) will come on to indicate that there isa malfunction in the DPF. If this happens,you should consult a workshop to repairthe problem immediately. We recommendyour authorised Chevrolet repairer. Duringregeneration, additional fuel is injected viamultiple post injections to increase the ex-haust gas temperature. During this period,the DPF temperature is raised to approxi-mately 600°C and the deposited soot isoxidized or burned off to carbon-dioxide(CO2).
CAUTION
The engine performance can be reducedwhen excess soot in the DPF was accu-mulated. If this happens, you shouldconsult a workshop to repair the prob-lem immediately. We recommend yourauthorised Chevrolet repairer.
WARNING
Be sure the following precautions aretaken because the exhaust parts areraised to high temperature during re-generation of DPF.
• Things that can burn could touchhot exhaust parts under your vehicleand ignite. Do not place your vehicleover papers, leaves, dry grass or otherthings that can burns.
• Turn the ignition OFF as soon asyour vehicle enters a garage.
• Do not go near the hot exhaust partsincluding exhaust tail pipe.
The pressure pipes, which are connected tothe differential pressure sensor, measure thelevel of soot deposit in the coated dieselparticulate filter and protect the engine bytriggering regeneration when critical sootlevel is detected in the filter.Pre-catalyst (Precat) and main diesel oxida-tion catalyst are coated with noble metal andhave the function of reducing hydrocarbons(HC) and carbon monoxide (CO) emis-sions. Also, during regeneration, these com-ponents help to increase the exhaust gastemperature by burning the post injectedfuel. The in-cylinder post injection allowsfilter regeneration to occur over the entireengine operating range as well as under allambient temperature and pressure condi-tions.
6–30 SERVICE AND VEHICLE CARE
S3W6251A
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
See “SCHEDULED MAINTENANCESERVICES” in the service guide.
CLEANING THE AIR CLEANER
If the air cleaner element is dirty, you maytry to clean it as follows:
1. Shake the air cleaner element to removesurface dust.
2. Clean the inside of the air cleaner hous-ing.
3. Cover the open filter housing with adamp cloth while cleaning the element.
4. Clean air filter element by blowing com-pressed air through it in the directionopposite normal airflow.
Normalair flow
CAUTION
The engine needs clean air to operateproperly.
• Do not operate your vehicle withoutthe air cleaner element installed.
Driving without the air cleaner elementproperly installed can damage your en-gine.
AIR CLEANERRegularly inspect and change the air cleanerelement according to the service schedule inthis manual.
N4W6241A
SERVICE AND VEHICLE CARE 6–31
NOTE
When replacing new spark plugs, theentire set should be replaced at a time.
5. Install each spark plug by hand as faras it will go.
6. Each spark plug should be tightened tothe correct torque figure (25N.m).
7. Fasten the spark plug wire terminalsquarely and firmly over the end of eachspark plug until you feel it snap intoplace. Make sure the spark plug wiresare in the correct order.
INSPECTING AND REPLACING SPARKPLUGS
1. Once the engine has cooled to the touch,disconnect the spark plug wire by pull-ing on the boot, not the cable.
2. Use a 16 mm spark plug socket andremove the spark plugs from the engine.Be sure contaminants not to enter thespark plug hole.
3. Inspect the spark plugs for damage tothe insulator. Replace the spark plug ifthe insulator is cracked or broken. Oth-erwise, wipe the insulator clean.
4. Using a very fine wire brush, clean theupper contact tip and electrode. Aftercleaning, adjust the gap to the specifica-tion.
See “VEHICLE SPECIFICATION” inthe index for the spark plug specifica-tion.
S3W6281A
gap
WARNING
Electronic ignition systems have greatervoltage than conventional systems.
• Do not touch components of ignitionsystem. Touching ignition systemcomponents could cause shock orelectrocution, resulting in serious in-juries.
CAUTION
Spark plugs can become extremely hotand could cause serious injury.
• Do not handle hot spark plugs.
SPARK PLUGSIGNITION SYSTEM
If you experience reduced performance orfuel economy, follow the procedure to in-spect and clean spark plugs.
6–32 SERVICE AND VEHICLE CARE
DRIVE BELTFor the alternator, power steering pumpand air conditioning compressor to func-tion properly, the drive belt should be ingood condition and adjusted properly.Replace the drive belt if it is worn, cracked,or frayed.
CAUTION
If you leave the key in the ignition, theengine could be started unexpectedly.
• Do not leave the key in the ignitionwhile checking the drive belt.
Moving parts of an operating engine cancause serious injuries.
SPARK PLUG SPECIFICATION ANDMAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
Spark plug specification
See “VEHICLE SPECIFICATION” in theindex for the type and the gap of the sparkplugs.
Maintenance schedule
See “SCHEDULED MAINTENANCESERVICES” in the service guide.
CAUTION
• Over-tightening spark plugs can dam-age the threads in the cylinder head.
• Under-tightening spark plugs cancause the spark plug to become veryhot.
Over-tightening or under-tighteningspark plugs can damage the engine.
SERVICE AND VEHICLE CARE 6–33
WARNING
Battery acid can cause severe burns, ex-plode, and damage paint.
• Avoid skin and clothing contact withbattery acid.
• Keep flames, sparks and smokingmaterials away from battery.
BATTERYYour vehicle is equipped with a mainte-nance-free battery.
MAINTENANCE SHCHEDULE
See “SCHEDULED MAINTENANCESERVICES” in the service guide.
CHECKING DRIVE BELT
To check drive belt tension:
1. Apply moderate thumb pressure mid-way between the longest unsupportedspan of the drive belt. Your thumb pres-sure should be about 20 lbs(10kgf).
2. Deflection of the drive belt caused byyour thumb pressure should be about0.5 inch (10 mm).
3. If the belt is too loose, ask a workshopto adjust it. We recommend yourauthorised Chevrolet repairer.
S3W6311A
6–34 SERVICE AND VEHICLE CARE
CAUTION
• When reconnecting the cable to thebattery, be careful to ensure theclamps are fully seated, then tightenthe retaining bolts so the clamps willnot vibrate loose.
• Be sure to attach the red cable to thepositive (+) battery terminal and theblack cable to the negative (-) batteryterminal.
Connecting the vehicle’s battery cables tothe wrong terminals can result in per-sonal injuries and damage to your ve-hicle and other property.
8. Coat the terminals with petroleum jellyor terminal grease to help prevent futurecorrosion.
NOTE
Be sure to keep in mind that the posi-tive terminal (+) is first when connecting,and the negative terminal (-) is first whendisconnecting.
BATTERY MAINTENANCE
To extend the life of your vehicle’s battery,be sure to do the following:
• Keep the battery mounted securely.
• Keep the top of the battery clean and dry.
• Keep the terminals and connectionsclean, tight and coated with petroleumjelly or terminal grease.
• Immediately rinse off any spilled electro-lyte using a solution of water and bak-ing soda.
• If your vehicle will not be used for anextended time, disconnect the cable fromthe negative (-) terminal.
• Charge a disconnected battery every sixweeks.
CLEANING THE BATTERY TERMINALS
1. Turn the ignition OFF and remove thekey from the ignition key slot.
2. Use a wrench to loosen and remove thebattery cable clamps from the terminals.Always disconnect the negative (-) termi-nal first.
3. Use a wire brush or a terminal cleaningtool to clean the terminals.
4. Check the battery terminals for white orbluish powder, which are signs of cor-rosion.
5. Remove any corrosion with a solutionof baking soda and water. The bakingsoda-and-water solution will bubble andturn brown.
6. When the bubbling stops, wash the so-lution off with plain water and dry thebattery with a cloth or paper towel.
7. Reconnect and tighten the positive (+)terminal, then the negative (-) terminal.Always reconnect the negative terminal(-) last.
SERVICE AND VEHICLE CARE 6–35
S3W6361A S3W6371A
CLUTCH PEDAL*CHECKING CLUTCH PEDAL FREE PLAY
Clutch pedal free play must be:
6~12 mm (0.24 ~0.47 in)
To check the clutch pedal free play, do thefollowing:1. Turn engine off.2. Press clutch pedal by hand measuring
distance the pedal moves until you feelresistance.
3. If free play differs from that specifiedabove, have a workshop adjust theclutch pedal or linkage. We recommendyour authorised Chevrolet repairer.
BRAKE PEDALCHECKING BRAKE PEDAL FREE PLAY
Brake pedal free play must be:
1~8 mm (0.04 ~0.31 in)
1. Turn engine off.2. Press the brake pedal several times to
deplete the vacuum in the brake system.3. Press brake pedal by hand, measuring
the distance the pedal moves until youfeel a slight resistance.
4. If free play differs from that specified inthis manual, have a workshop adjustbrakes. We recommend your authorisedChevrolet repairer.
NOTE
Batteries contain toxic material. Usedbatteries can be hazardous to healthand environment.• Do not dispose of battery with house-
hold waste. Use locally authorisedautomotive waste disposal facilitiesonly.
6–36 SERVICE AND VEHICLE CARE
CAUTION
• Do not drive your vehicle if the engineis running roughly or lacks power.These symptoms can point to seriousmechanical problems.
Operating your vehicle under these con-ditions can cause serious damage to thecatalytic converter and other parts ofthe vehicle.
Consult a workshop as soon as possible ifany of the following occur:
• Engine misfires.
• Engine runs rough following a coldstart.
• Engine loses power.
• Vehicle exhibits unusual operating con-ditions which may indicate a fault in theignition system.
We recommend that you consult yourauthorised Chevrolet repairer.
S3W6391A
CATALYTIC CONVERTER CAUTION
Your vehicle is equipped with a catalyticconverter.
• Do not use leaded fuel in this vehicle.
On vehicles with a catalytic converter, thefuel tank has a narrow filler neck whichmakes it impossible to insert a nozzle forleaded fuel.
CAUTION
The catalytic converter can be damagedby imperfect combustion if you keepstarting the engine with the acceleratorpedal pressed when having difficultystarting the engine.
HANDBRAKEThe handbrake alone should hold yourvehicle on a fairly steep grade.
CHECKING HANDBRAKE TRAVEL
Handbrake lever travel must be:
7~10 notches, with a force of approxi-mately 20 kgf (44 lbs).
To check the handbrake stroke, do the fol-lowing:
1. Turn engine off.
2. Apply handbrake, counting notch clicksyou hear. If the number of clicks differsfrom that specified above, have a work-shop adjust the handbrake. We recom-mend your authorised Chevrolet re-pairer.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
See “SCHEDULED MAINTENANCESERVICES” in the service guide.
SERVICE AND VEHICLE CARE 6–37
S3W6401A
WARNING
• Never overload your vehicle.• Always drive with properly inflated
tyres.• Always check tyre inflation pressure
when the tyres are cold (ambient tem-perature).
CAUTION
Use of unsuitable tyres and/or wheelsmay lead to a collision.
• Consult a workshop before youchange your original tyres or wheels.
This can result in personal injuries anddamage to your vehicle or other property.We recommend that you consult yourauthorised Chevrolet repairer.
WHEELS AND TYRESFactory- fitted tyres are matched to yourvehicle, offering the most effective combina-tion of ride comfort, tread life and perfor-mance.
MAINTENANCE
Maintaining tyres at pressure specified inthis manual will ensure the most effectivecombination of driving comfort, safety andperformance.Use an accurate tyre pressure gauge tocheck the pressure of tyres when they arecold. Securely retighten the valve caps afterchecking tyre inflation pressure.
Underinflation
Correct
inflation
Overinflation
NOTE
Check inflation pressure when tyres arecold. Warm tyres produce inaccuratereadings. Tyres can become warm afteryou have driven more than one mile(1.6 km) and stay warm for up to threehours after vehicle has been sitting.
CAUTION
• Avoid frequent repeated cold starts.• Do not hold the key in START for
more than 15 seconds while trying tostart your vehicle.
• Do not let the fuel tank run dry.• Do not start the engine by pushing or
towing your vehicle. Use jump start-ing.
Failure to follow these instructions maydamage your vehicle engine, fuel, and/oremission systems.
Make sure to have all your vehicle mainte-nance done. We recommend that you con-sult your authorised Chevrolet repairer.
This will insure that:
• All vehicle components operate correctly.
• Your vehicle will have minimal exhaustemissions.
• Your vehicle’s catalytic converter systemwill have a long life.
6–38 SERVICE AND VEHICLE CARE
BUILT-IN TREAD WEAR INDICATOR
Regularly check the tread depth of yourtyres using the tyre’s built-in tread wear in-dicators. Markings on the sidewalls indicatethe locations of the tread wear indicators.
Caring for your tyres and wheelsDriving over sharp objects can damage thetyres and wheels. If some objects are un-avoidable, drive over them slowly and at aright angle, if possible.
When parking, avoid making contact withthe curb.
Periodic tyre inspection
• Visual damage.
• Foreign objects
• Punctures.
• Cuts.
• Cracks.
• Bulges in the sidewalls.
Check the wheels for damage.
Tyre defects including those above can causeloss of control of your vehicle, resulting ina possible collision.
If your tyres or wheels are damaged orshow abnormal wear, consult a workshop.We recommend your authorised Chevroletrepairer.
CAUTION
Use of tyres of a size other than origi-nally fitted to your vehicle may cause in-terference between tyres and vehicle com-ponents, and may result in tyre and ve-hicle damage.
Your vehicle was delivered with radial tyres.We recommend using radials of the samesize, design, tread wear, temperature andspeed rating at time of replacement.
See “VEHICLE SPECIFICATION” in theindex for correct tyre inflation pressure.
Tyre condition should be inspected beforedriving and tyre pressure should bechecked each time you fill your fuel tankor at least once a month using a tyre pres-sure gauge.
Incorrect tyre inflation pressures will:
• Increase tyre wear.
• Impair vehicle handling and safe opera-tion.
• Affect ride comfort.
• Reduce fuel economy.
If tyre pressures are too low, tyres can over-heat and suffer internal damage, tread sepa-ration, and even a blowout at high speeds.Even if you later adjust the inflation pres-sure of your tyres, previous driving withlow pressure may have damaged the tyres.
SERVICE AND VEHICLE CARE 6–39
L7W6006A
WARNING
• Use the recommended wheels andwheel lug nuts/bolts only.
Otherwise, you can lose control of yourvehicle and cause a collision that canresult in injuries or damage to your ve-hicle or other property.
TYRE ROTATION
Front and rear tyres perform different jobsand can wear differently.
Normally, the front tyres will wear fasterthan rear tyres. To prolong the life of yourtyres and avoid uneven tread wear:
1. Should the front tyres show greater wearthan the rear tyres, have both frontwheels exchanged with the rear wheels.
2. Maintain proper tyre pressure.
3. Check tightening of the lug nuts/bolts.
See “HOW TO CHANGE A FLAT TYRE”in the index.
WINTER TYRES
If you decide to use winter tyres:
• Use them on all four wheels.
• Never exceed the maximum speed speci-fied by the tyre manufacturer.
• Always use the tyre pressure specified bythe tyre manufacturer.
S3W6411A
CAUTION
• Do not drive on worn or damagedtyres.
Such tyres can cause you to lose controlof the vehicle and a collision, resultingin injuries or damage to your vehicle orother property.
Replace tyres when the tread wear indica-tors become visible. The wear indicatorsappear between the tread grooves when thetread depth is 1.6 mm (0.06 in) or less.
NOTE
Always dispose of worn tyres accordingto local environmental regulation.
Tread wear indicator
6–40 SERVICE AND VEHICLE CARE
NOTE
• SAE class S-type chains are the propertype for your vehicle.
• Always drive slowly when you areusing tyre chains.
• If you hear the chains contacting thevehicle, stop and re-tighten the chains.
• If the contact continues, slow downuntil it stops.
TEMPORARY SPARE TIRE
Although the compact spare was fully in-flated when your vehicle was new, it can loseair over time. Check the inflation pressureregularly.
See “VEHICLE SPECIFICATION” in theindex for correct inflation pressure.
CAUTION
• Do not use automatic car washes towash your vehicle while a temporaryspare is installed as a road tire andwheel.
CAUTION
• Do not use tire chains on the tempo-rary spare tire. They will not fit prop-erly.
Using tire chains on the temporary sparetire will damage both the vehicle and thechains.
TYRE CHAINS
Before fitting chains, remove wheel covers(if so equipped) to avoid scratching them.
• Follow the chain manufacturer’s instruc-tions.
• Secure the chains on the front tyres astightly as possible.
• Re-tighten the chains after driving about0.5 mile (about 1.0km)
Chains are not recommended for the reartyres. The use of tire chains on tire size205/45R16 is not permissible.
CAUTION
Use of snow chains could adversely af-fect vehicle handling.
• Do not exeed 50 km/h (30 mph) orthe chain manufacturer’s recom-mended speed limit, whichever islower.
• Avoid sharp turns, bumps and holes.• Avoid locked-wheel braking.
SERVICE AND VEHICLE CARE 6–41
CAUTION
Your hands could be hurt by sharpmaterials around the filter housing.
• Be sure to wear protective gloves whenreplacing air conditioner filter.
FILTER REPLACEMENT
1. Remove 4 screws from the filter coverbelow the glove box.
2. Remove the filter cover.
AIR CONDITIONER FILTER *The filter removes dust, pollen and manyother airborne irritants from outside airwhich is drawn in by your heat and venti-lation system.
N4G6461P
CAUTION
Driving with clogged filter element canoverheat the blower motor and damageit.
• Replace filter at the intervals specifiedin the service guide, “SCHEDULEDMAINTENANCE SERVICES”.
3. Replace the air conditioner filter.
NOTE
When inserting new filter, make sure theyare inserted to the correct airflow.
N4G6462P
6–42 SERVICE AND VEHICLE CARE
N4W6482A
N4W6481P
FUSE BLOCK
• Interior fuse block is located in the rightside of the instrument panel.
• Engine room fuse block is next to thecoolant reservoir.
Interior fuse block
Engine room fuse block
4. Determine what caused the fuse to blow,and repair that problem.
5. Install a new fuse of the rating specifiedin this manual. (See fuse block layoutlater in this section)
CAUTION
Using a fuse substitute or a fuse of thewrong type or rating can damage the elec-trical system or even start a fire.
• Use only specified fuse and do not usea different type or rating other thanspecified in this manual.
Such use can result in personal injuriesor damage to your vehicle or other prop-erty.
NOTE
Three spare fuses (10A, 15A and 25A)are provided in the fuse and relay blockin the engine compartment.
S3W6471A
FUSESTo replace a fuse:
1. Open the fuse cover.
2. Identify the defective fuse by its meltedelement.
3. Remove blown fuse with the fuse puller.The fuse puller is located in the engineroom fuse box.
CAUTION
• Do not use tools that can conduct elec-tricity when removing a blown fuse.Use only provided fuse puller.
Using conductor such as metal can causea short circuit, damaging the electricalsystem or start a fire. Serious injurycould occur.
SERVICE AND VEHICLE CARE 6–43
N7W6005A
NOTE
Not all fuse block descriptions in thismanual may be applicable to your ve-hicle. It is accurate at the time of print-ing. When you inspect the fuse box onyour vehicle, refer to the fuse box label.
• Auxiliary engine room fuse block (Dieselonly) is located nearby engine
Auxiliary engine room fuse block
6–44 SERVICE AND VEHICLE CARE
Interior fuse block
N4W6483P
10A
AIR
BA
G
25A
WIP
ER
10A
AU
DIO
/CLO
CK
10A
EC
M
15A
EX
TR
A J
AC
K
15A
TU
RN
SIG
NA
L
10A
AB
S*
15A
CIG
AR
LIG
HTE
R
10A
CL
UST
ER
10A
IMM
OB
ILSE
R
10A
BA
CK
-UP
10A
TC
M*
15A
RE
AR
FO
G
10A
EN
G F
USE
15A
HA
ZA
RD
15A
AT
C*/
CL
OC
K
20A
HV
AC
15A
AN
TI-
TH
EFT
*
15A
AU
DIO
15A
SUN
RO
OF*
10A
DIA
GN
OSI
S
10A
IMM
OB
ILIS
ER
CA
UT
ION
: USE
SPE
CIF
IED
FU
SES
ON
LY*
OPT
ION
AL
EQU
IPM
ENT
SERVICE AND VEHICLE CARE 6–45
Engine room fuse block
N4W6484A
CA
UT
ION
: USE
SPE
CIF
IED
FU
SES
ON
LY*
OPT
ION
AL
EQU
IPM
ENT
BA
TT
MA
IN
30A
AB
S*
60A
BL
OW
ER
MO
TO
R30
A
IGN
-2
30A
IGN
-1
30A
E LEC
FA
N L
O
20A
EL
EC
FA
NH
I30
A1)
DE
FOG
30A
POW
ER
WIN
DO
W20
A
ILL
UM
INA
TIO
N R
EL
AY
FRT
FO
G R
EL
AY
*
A/C
CO
MP*
RE
LA
Y
FUE
L P
UM
PR
EL
AY
POW
ER W
IND
OW
RE
LA
Y
HO
RN
RE
LA
Y
MA
IN R
EL
AY
HE
AD
LA
MP
RE
LA
Y
EL
EC
FA
N L
OR
EL
AY
DE
FOG
RE
LA
Y
2)
EL
EC
FA
N H
IR
EL
AY
25
A1
0A
15
A
15
A1
5A
10
A
15
A1
0A
15
A
15
A
10
A
15
A
15
A
20
A
15
A
15
A
10
A
HEADLAMP
ECM
DIS
PASS F/BOX
FUEL PUMP
A/C*
DOOR LOCK
MIR. HEAT
FOG
HORN IL LH
H/L HI EMS 2
DR’S P/WDO EMS 1
STOP H/L LO LH
10
AS PARE
15
AS PARE
25
AS PARE
10
AH/L LO RH
10
AIL RH
FUSE
PUL
LE
R
1) Diesel : 40A2) Diesel : ELEC FAN HI
DUMMY PLUG
6–46 SERVICE AND VEHICLE CARE
Auxiliary engine room fuse block (Diesel only)*
RLY 4PTC- 3
RLY 3PTC- 2
RLY 2PTC -1
RLY 1F/F
HEATERB+
S/B540A
S/B440A
S/B340A
S/B230A S/B1
60A
SERVICE AND VEHICLE CARE 6–47
WARNING
Halogen bulbs contain pressurised gas.Take special care when handling anddisposing of halogen bulbs.
• Wear eye protection when workingwith bulbs.
• Protect the bulb from abrasions andscratches.
• When the bulb is illuminated and notin a sealed installation, protect thebulb from contact with liquids.
• Only illuminate the bulb when it isinstalled in a lamp.
• Replace a cracked or damagedheadlamp.
• When replacing halogen bulbs, DONOT touch the glass part with barefingers.
• Keep the bulbs away from children.• Dispose of used bulbs with care. Oth-
erwise the bulbs can explode.
CAUTION
• Clean your halogen bulbs with alco-hol or mineral spirits and a lint-freecloth. Be sure not to touch them withyour bare hands.
Fingerprints may drastically shorten theeffective life of halogen bulbs.
LAMPSHEADLAMPS
Bulb replacement (Saloon/Wagon)
1. Open the bonnet.
2. Remove two bolts (1) and one nut (2).
3. Disconnect the wiring harness connectorfrom the rear of the bulb.
4. Remove the headlamp cap.
5. Release the spring that retains the bulb.
6. Remove the bulb.
7. Install the correct replacement headlampbulb. See “BULB SPECIFICATIONS” inthe index.
8. Reinstall the bulb retaining spring.
9. Replace the headlamp cap.
10.Connect the wiring harness connector.
N4W6502AN4W6501A
low beam bulb
High beam bulb
6–48 SERVICE AND VEHICLE CARE
SIDELIGHTS
Bulb replacement
1. Open the bonnet.
2. Remove the headlamp assembly.
3. Remove the headlamp cap.
4. Pull out the sidelight holder next to theheadlamp bulb.
5. Remove the bulb by pulling it straightout of the bulb holder.
N4W6511A
Bulb replacement (Hatchback)
1. Open the bonnet.
2. Remove the four screws and the radia-tor grill.
3. Remove the three bolts.
4. Disconnect the wiring harness connectorfrom the rear of the bulb.
5. Remove the headlamp cap.
6. Release the spring that retains the bulb.
7. Remove the bulb.
8. Install the correct replacement headlampbulb. See “BULB SPECIFICATIONS” inthe index.
9. Reinstall the bulb retaining spring.
10.Replace the headlamp cap.
11.Connect the wiring harness connector.
CAUTION
• Clean your halogen bulbs with alco-hol or mineral spirits and a lint-freecloth. Be sure not to touch them withyour bare hands.
Fingerprints may drastically shorten theeffective life of halogen bulbs.
N4W6503A N4W6504A
(Saloon/Wagon)
SERVICE AND VEHICLE CARE 6–49
6. Install a new bulb into the holder. See“BULB SPECIFICATIONS” in the in-dex.
7. Replace the head lamp cap.
8. Connect the wiring harness connector.
FRONT TURN SIGNAL LAMPS
Bulb replacement
1. Open the bonnet.
2. Remove the headlamp assembly.
3. Rotate the front turn signal bulb holdercounterclockwise.
N4W6521AN4W6512A
(Saloon/Wagon)
4. Pull the front turn signal bulb holder outof the lamp housing.
5. Press the bulb inward and rotate it coun-terclockwise to remove it from the bulbholder.
6. Install a new bulb into the holder bypressing it in and rotating it clockwise.See “BULB SPECIFICATIONS” in theindex.
7. Install the holder into the lamp housingby rotating it clockwise.
8. Reinstall the headlamp assembly.
N4W6522A
(Hatchback) (Hatchback)
6–50 SERVICE AND VEHICLE CARE
SIDE TURN SIGNAL LAMPS
Bulb replacement
1. Remove the side turn signal lamp assem-bly by pulling it rearward.
2. Rotate the bulb holder counterclockwise.
3. Remove the bulb from the lamp hous-ing by pulling the bulb straight out ofthe holder.
4. Insert the correct replacement bulb in thebulb holder by pushing in and rotatingthe bulb holder clockwise. See “BULBSPECIFICATIONS” in the index.
5. Push the side turn signal lamp assemblyback into its original position.
N4W6541A
FRONT FOG LAMPS*
Bulb replacement
1. Disconnect the wiring harness connectorfrom the front fog lamp bulb.
WARNING
This work requires special equipment tobe completed.• Have a workshop do this work if you
are not confident of completing thetask safely.
Otherwise, you could be injured or dam-age the vehicle. We recommend that youconsult your authorised Chevrolet re-pairer.
N4W6531A
2. Rotate the front fog lamp bulb counter-clockwise and remove it.
3. Replace the bulb. See “BULB SPECIFI-CATIONS” in the index.
4. Connect the wiring harness connector tothe front fog lamp bulb.
SERVICE AND VEHICLE CARE 6–51
5. Insert a correct replacement bulb intothe bulb holder. See “BULB SPECIFI-CATIONS” in the index.
6. Replace the bulb holder into the lamphousing. Twist the bulb holder clockwiseto secure.
7. Replace the trim cover and close bootlid.
REVERSE, TAIL, BRAKE, REAR INDICATORAND REAR FOG LAMPS
Bulb replacement (Saloon)
1. Open the boot lid.
2. Open the trim cover.
3. Remove the bulb holder by rotating itcounterclockwise.
4. Remove the bulb from the holder bypressing the bulb and rotating it coun-terclockwise.
N4W6551A
Bulb replacement (Hatchback)
To replace tail, brake, and rear turn signallamp bulbs:
1. Open the tailgate.
2. Remove the two screws and the lampassembly.
3. Remove the bulb holder by rotating itcounterclockwise from the lamp hous-ing.
4. Remove the bulb from the holder bypressing the bulb and rotating it coun-terclockwise.
N4W6552A
6–52 SERVICE AND VEHICLE CARE
5. Insert a correct replacement bulb intothe bulb holder. See “BULB SPECIFI-CATIONS” in the index.
6. Replace the bulb holder into the lamphousing.
7. Replace the lamp housing into the ve-hicle using the two screws removed ear-lier.
8. Close the tailgate.
To replace backup and rear fog lamp bulbs:
1. Open the tailgate.
2. Remove the protective cover.
3. Remove the bulb holder by rotating itcounterclockwise.
4. Remove the bulb from the holder bypressing the bulb and rotating it coun-terclockwise.
5. Insert a proper replacement bulb into thebulb holder. See “BULB SPECIFICA-TIONS” in the index.
6. Replace the bulb holder into the lamphousing. Twist the bulb holder clockwiseto secure.
7. Replace the protective cover and closethe tailgate.
N4W6553A
SERVICE AND VEHICLE CARE 6–53
N5W6001A
Bulb replacement (Wagon)
1. Open the tailgate.
2. Remove the two screws and the lampassembly.
3. Remove the bulb holder by rotating itcounterclockwise from the lamp hous-ing.
4. Remove the bulb from the holder bypressing the bulb and rotating it coun-terclockwise.
5. Insert a correct replacement bulb intothe bulb holder. See “BULB SPECIFI-CATIONS” in the index.
6. Replace the bulb holder into the lamphousing.
7. Replace the lamp housing into the ve-hicle using the two screws removed ear-lier.
8. Close the tailgate.
HIGH-MOUNTED STOP LAMP
Bulb replacement (Saloon)
1. Open the boot lid.
2. Remove the two screws and the lamphousing. Disconnect the wiring harnessconnector before removing the lamphousing.
3. Remove the two screws and the reflec-tor assembly.
4. Remove the bulb by pulling it straightout of the bulb holder.
5. Install a new bulb. See “BULB SPECIFI-CATIONS” in the index.
6. Reinstall the lamp housing.
N4W6561A
6–54 SERVICE AND VEHICLE CARE
NUMBER PLATE LAMP
Bulb replacement
1. Remove the two screws and the lampcovers.
2. To remove the bulb holder from thelamp housing, rotate the bulb holdercounterclockwise.
3. Pull the bulb out from the bulb holder.
4. Replace the bulb. See “BULB SPECIFI-CATIONS” in the index.
5. Install the bulb holder into the lamphousing by rotating the bulb holderclockwise.
6. Replace the lamp covers.
Bulb replacement (Hatchback)
1. Open the tailgate.
2. Pry off the trim and remove the twoscrews.
3. Remove the bulb holder from the lamphousing.
4. Remove the bulb by pulling it straightout of the bulb holder.
5. Insert a correct replacement bulb intothe bulb holder. See “BULB SPECIFI-CATIONS” in the index.
6. Replace the lamp housing and trim inreverse order.
N4W6562A N4W6571BN5W6002A
Bulb replacement (Wagon)
1. Open the tailgate.
2. Remove the two screws and the tailgatetrim cover.
3. Remove the bulb by pulling it straightout of the bulb holder.
4. Install a new bulb. See “BULB SPECIFI-CATIONS” in the index.
5. Reinstall the tailgate trim cover using thetwo screws removed earlier.
6. Close the tailgate.
SERVICE AND VEHICLE CARE 6–55
WARNING
Some cleaners may be poisonous, cor-rosive, or flammable.
• Improper use of these cleaners can bedangerous. Their use may cause per-sonal injury or damage to your ve-hicle.
VEHICLE CARECLEANING AGENTS
Follow the manufacturer’s advice wheneveryou use cleaning agents or other chemicalson the inside or the outside of your vehicle.
When cleaning the inside or outside of yourvehicle, do not use hazardous cleaning sol-vents such as:
• Acetone.
• Lacquer thinners.
• Enamel reducers.
• Nail polish removers.
LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT LAMP
Bulb replacement
1. Use a flat screwdriver to pry the lampassembly from the lamp assembly holder.
2. Replace the bulb. See “BULB SPECIFI-CATIONS” in the index.
3. Install the lamp assembly.
N4W6591A
DOME LAMP/MAP LIGHT
Bulb replacement
1. Use a flat-blade screwdriver to pry thelamp lens away from the headliner.
2. Remove the bulb.
3. Replace the bulb. See “BULB SPECIFI-CATIONS” in the index.
4. Reinstall the lamp lens.
N4W6581A
6–56 SERVICE AND VEHICLE CARE
Open the doors to allow proper ventilationwhen you use any cleaning agents or otherchemicals in the vehicle interior.
CAUTION
Do not let non colour-fast fabrics comein contact with the interior trim of yourvehicle, unless both materials are com-pletely dry.
To avoid the possible permanent dis-colouration of light-coloured interior trim,do not let non colour-fast materials comeinto contact with seat trim unless both ma-terials are completely dry. Following is abrief list of fabric items which may containnon colour-fast:
• Casual clothing.
• Coloured denim.
• Corduroy.
• Leather.
• Suede.
• Newspaper.
• Decorative paper items.
CAUTION
• Make sure to use the proper cleaningtechniques and materials when youclean the trim of your vehicle.
Failure to do so, especially on the firstcleaning, may result in water spots,rings, and permanent stains.
These can permanently damage yourvehicle.
It is very important to use the proper tech-niques and cleaners on the interior andexterior of your vehicle.
Use a vacuum cleaner or soft bristle brushfrequently to remove dust and loose dirtthat collect on the interior fabrics.
Wiped vinyl and leather trim regularly witha clean damp cloth.
Clean normal soil, spots, or stains from thetrim with appropriate cleaners.
CARE AND CLEANING OF THEINTERIOR
WARNING
• Avoid overexposure to vapours fromcleaning agents and other chemicals.
Such vapours can be dangerous andthey may cause health problems whichare more likely to occur in small,unventilated spaces.
When cleaning the inside or outside of yourvehicle, do not use cleaning materials suchas the following, except as noted in the fab-ric cleaning advice on stain removal:
• Laundry soaps.
• Bleaches.
• Reducing agents.
Never use the following for any cleaningpurpose:
• Carbon tetrachloride.
• Gasoline.
• Benzene.
• Naphtha.
SERVICE AND VEHICLE CARE 6–57
CAUTION
Abrasive cleaners can scratch the glassand damage the rear window defoggergridlines.
• Never use abrasive cleaners on vehicleglass.
Such damage can impair the driver’svision.
CAUTION
Decals may damage the rear windowdefogger.
• Never place decals on the inside of therear window.
Such damage can impair the driver’svision.
GLASS SURFACES
Keeping the window glass clear will reduceglare and improve visibility.
CAUTION
You must keep your safety belts inproper working condition to maintaintheir effectiveness.
Safety belt care
Always keep the safety belts clean and dry.Avoid contamination of the safety belt web-bing with polish, oil and other chemicals,particularly battery acid, bleach or dye.These contaminants may lead to weakeningof your safety belt webbing material.Periodically inspect all parts of the safety belts.Replace damaged safety belts or componentsimmediately.You must replace any safety belt that hasbeen stretched in an accident, even if the dam-age is not obvious or visible. Replacementsafety belts must be new.We recommend replacing the entire safetybelt assembly after your vehicle has been ina collision. If a trained specialist finds thatno safety belt damage has occurred in an ac-cident, and that everything is in properworking order, then you don’t have to re-place the belts. We recommend that youconsult your authorised Chevrolet repairer.
CAUTION
If your front seats are equipped with sideair bags:
• Do not saturate the seat cover withupholstery cleaner.
• Do not use chemical solvents or strongdetergents on the seat cover.
Failure to follow these precautions canmake your side air bag modules contami-nated and this can affect the perfor-mance of your side air bag in a collision.
6–58 SERVICE AND VEHICLE CARE
CARE AND CLEANING OF THEEXTERIOR
Washing your vehicle
The best way to preserve the finish of yourvehicle is to keep it clean by washing it fre-quently.
• Park your car out of direct sunlight.
• Use mild soap specified for washing carswith cold or lukewarm water.
• Make sure to rinse all soaps and clean-ers completely off the surface.
NOTE
• Do not use household dishwashingliquid to wash your car.
Dish soap will wash car wax off yourpaint.
CAUTION
• Avoid high-pressure car washes.They may cause water to enter yourvehicle, damaging the interior.
We designed your vehicle to withstand nor-mal environmental conditions and naturalelements.
CAUTION
Your antenna could be damaged by theautomatic car wash.
• Retract your power antenna by turn-ing the audio off.
• Remove your mast or roof antennamanually.
Cleaning the outside of the windscreen
Wax or other material on the windscreenor the blade of the windscreen wiper cancause the wiper blade to chatter duringoperation. Such foreign materials also canmake it difficult to keep your windscreenclean.
Periodically use a non-abrasive cleaner onthe outside of the windscreen.
Water will not bead on a clean windscreen.
SERVICE AND VEHICLE CARE 6–59
CORROSION PROTECTION
We designed your vehicle to resist corro-sion. Special materials and protective fin-ishes used on most parts of your car helpmaintain its good appearance, strength, andreliability.
Surface rust may appear on certain com-ponents found in the engine compartmentor under the body, but will not affect thereliability or function of these components.
Sheet metal damage
If the vehicle needs body repair or replace-ment, make sure the repair shop appliesproper anticorrosion material to restorecorrosion protection. See “FINISH DAM-AGE” later in this section.
CAUTION
Do not use abrasive cleaners or brushesto clean aluminum wheels or wheelcovers.
Cleaning aluminum wheels and wheelcovers
To preserve the original appearance of thewheels and wheel covers, keep them freefrom road dirt and brake dust buildup.
Clean the wheels/wheel covers regularly,avoiding abrasive cleaners or brushes thatcan damage the finish.
Polishing and waxing
Periodically polish your vehicle to removesurface residue. After polishing, protect thepaint with a high quality automotive wax.
Protecting exterior bright metal parts
Clean bright metal trim parts regularly.Washing with water is all that is usuallyneeded.
CAUTION
• Never use an automotive or chromepolish, steam, or a caustic soap toclean or polish aluminum trim.
Such materials can be too abrasive, re-sulting in damage to trim and wheels.
When waxing your car, also wax all brightmetal parts.
6–60 SERVICE AND VEHICLE CARE
NOTE
When you wash the engine compartment,fuel, grease, and oil residue may be re-leased into the environment.
Wash the engine at your dealer or otherlocation equipped with an oil separatorin the car wash bay.
Dispose of used engine oil, brake fluid,transaxle fluid, antifreeze, batteries, andtyres at local authorised waste disposalfacilities, or though a vendor who isunder legal obligation to do so whenyou replace such materials.
Never place any of these items withhousehold trash or pour them downdrains.
Mishandling of such potentially hazard-ous materials can cause permanent en-vironmental damage.
Finish damage
Repair stone chips, fractures, or deepscratches in the finish of as soon as pos-sible. Bare metal corrodes quickly.
You may use touch-up products to repairminor chips and scratches.
A body and paint shop can make repairson larger areas.
Underbody maintenance
Corrosive materials used for ice and snowremoval or dust control can collect on theunderbody of your vehicle. Failure to re-move these materials can accelerate corro-sion and rust.
Periodically use plain water to flush thesematerials from the underbody of your ve-hicle. Take care to clean any areas in whichmud and other debris can collect. Loosenany sediment packed in closed area beforeflushing with water.
If you wish, your authorised Chevrolet re-pairer can provide this service for you.
CAUTION
• Use only cleaners safe for use onpainted surfaces.
Other cleaners may permanently damagethe paint.
Foreign material deposits
The following materials may damagepainted surfaces:
• Calcium chloride and other salts.
• Ice-melting agents.
• Road oil and tar.
• Tree sap.
• Bird droppings.
• Industrial fallout.
Wash harmful materials off your vehiclepromptly. If soap and water do not removethe residue, use cleaners specifically in-tended for this purpose.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE 7–1
• GENERAL INFORMATION ..................................... 7-2
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE7• SEVERE CONDITIONS ........................................... 7-2
7–2 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
GENERAL INFORMATIONThis section provides the maintenanceschedule which is necessary to ensure thatyour vehicle gives many years of satisfyingmotoring.
You are responsible for properly operatingand maintaining your vehicle in accordancewith the instructions described in thismanual. Failure to do so is likely to resultin the denial of warranty coverage.
It is your responsibility to properly main-tain and operate your vehicle. Be sure thatyou follow the periodic required mainte-nance schedule and general operation in-structions in the service guide.
It is also your responsibility to keep recordsand receipts as proof of regular mainte-nance. Records and receipts together withthe service guide should be transferred toany subsequent owner.
You may have maintenance services per-formed on your vehicle by any qualifiedperson or facility. However, it is recom-mended that the maintenance services beperformed by an authorised repairer whowill have well-trained technicians and genu-ine parts.
Non-genuine parts and accessories have notbeen examined or approved by us. We cancertify neither the suitability nor the safetyof non-genuine parts and accessories andare not liable for damage caused by theiruse.
Inadequate, incomplete, or insufficient ser-vicing may result in operational problemswith your vehicle that could even lead tovehicle damage, an accident, or personalinjury.
SEVERE CONDITIONSYou should follow the periodic requiredmaintenance schedule. See “SCHEDULEDMAINTENANCE SERVICES” later in theservice guide.
NORMAL CONDITIONS
The normal condition for driving meansdriving under typical, everyday driving con-ditions. You may follow the ordinary main-tenance schedule.
SEVERE CONDITIONS
If the vehicle is operated under any of thefollowing conditions, some of the mainte-nance schedule items need to be servicedmore frequently. See numeric symbols in“SCHEDULED MAINTENANCESERVICES” later in the service guide.
• Repeated short-distance driving lessthan 5 miles (10 Km).
• Extensive idling and/or slow-speeddriving in stop-and-go traffic.
• Driving on dusty roads.
• Driving on hilly or mountainous terrain.
• Towing a trailer.
• Driving in heavy city traffic where theoutside temperatures regularly reach90°F(32°C) or higher.
• Driving as a taxi, police or deliveryvehicle.
• Frequent driving when outside tempera-ture remains below freezing.
TECHNICAL INFORMATION 8–1
8 TECHNICAL INFORMATION
• IDENTIFICATION NUMBERS ................................. 8-2
• FLUID CHART ....................................................... 8-4
• ENGINE OIL .......................................................... 8-5
• BULB SPECIFICATION (NOTCHBACK) ................. 8-6
• BULB SPECIFICATION (HATCHBACK) .................. 8-7
• BLUB SPECIFICATION (WAGON) ........................ 8-8
• VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS .................................... 8-9
8–2 TECHNICAL INFORMATION
S3W8021A S3W8031A
IDENTIFICATION NUMBERSVEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER(VIN)
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) isengraved on the centre of the fire wall.
ENGINE NUMBER
The gasoline engine number is stamped onthe front right-hand side of the cylinderblock.
The diesel engine number is stamped on thecylinder block under the No.4 branch ofthe exhaust manifold.
MANUAL TRANSAXLE IDENTIFICATIONNUMBER
Attached on the top of the transaxle casenear the engine.
N6A8001P
TECHNICAL INFORMATION 8–3
S3W8041A
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLEIDENTIFICATION NUMBER
Attached at the front upper side of thetransaxle case.
8–4 TECHNICAL INFORMATION
FLUID CHART
Gasoline
Diesel
Gasoline
Diesel
API SL (ILSAC GF-III) grade
SAE 5W-30
Hot area : SAE 10W-30
MB 229.31, ACEA C3 5W40
Silicate based coolant/
Dex-Cool coolant
ESSO JWS 3309 or
TOTAL FLUID III G
ESSO LT 71141 or
TOTAL ATF H50235
ESSO JWS 3309 US ATF
SAE 75W-90
DOT3 or DOT4
DEXRON® II D or DEXRON® III
3.75L
6.2L
7.2L
7.5L
8L
5.77 ± 0.2L
6.9 ± 0.2L
6.94 ± 0.15L
1.8L
2.1L
0.5L
1.1L
Gasoline
Diesel
Engine oil
(Including oil filter)
Engine Coolant
Automatic Transaxle Fluid
Manual Transaxle Fluid
Brake/Clutch Fluid
Power Steering Fluid
Item Capacity Classification
1.4D/1.6D
1.8D
2.0S
1.6D
1.8D
2.0S
Gasoline
Diesel
TECHNICAL INFORMATION 8–5
ENGINE OILAPI classification of engine oil
The International Lubricant Standardisationand Approval Committee (ILSAC), AmericanPetroleum Institute (API) and European Au-tomobile Manufacturer Association (ACEA)classify engine oils according to their perfor-mance quality.
EngineSelect an oil viscosity based on the outside air temperature. Do not switch to adifferent viscosity in the event of brief temperature fluctuations.
°F°C -30
-20
-20
0
-10 0 10
20 60
20
100
40
SAE 10 W-30, 10W-40
SAE 5 W-30, 5W-40
30
8040
SAE OW-30, OW-40
8–6 TECHNICAL INFORMATION
N5W8001A
4
3
2
5
1
6
Halogen bulb
Halogen bulb
Halogen bulb
1 Headlamp low beam
2 Headlamp high beam
3 Parking lamp
4 Indicator lamp
5 Fog lamp*
6 Side repeater lamp
7 Indicator lamp
8 Brake / tail lamp
9 Reverse lamp
10 Fog lamp
11 Centre high mounted stop lamp
12 Registration plate lamp
Dome lamp
Map light
Luggage lamp
BULB SPECIFICATION (Notchback)
Bulbs
Rear
Interior
Wattages x Quantity
55W x 2
55W x 2
5W x 2
21W x 2
27W x 2
5W x 2
21W x 2
21/5W x 4
21W x 2
21W x 2
5W x 5
5W x 2
10W x 1
7.5W x 2
10W x 1
Remarks
Front
N4W8072A
81112
7
10
9
* Bulb specification in some model can be different from the above table. Seethe wattage printed on the bulb before replacing burnt bulbs.
TECHNICAL INFORMATION 8–7
Halogen bulb
Halogen bulb
1 Headlamp (high/low)
2 Parking lamp
3 Indicator lamp
4 Fog lamp*
5 Side repeater lamp
6 Indicator lamp
7 Brake / tail lamp
8 Reverse lamp
9 Fog lamp
10 Centre high mounted stop lamp
11 Registration plate lamp
Dome lamp
Map light
Luggage lamp
BULB SPECIFICATION (Hatchback)
Bulbs
Rear
Interior
Wattages x Quantity
60/55W x 2
5W x 2
21W x 2
27W x 2
5W x 2
21W x 2
21/5W x 2
21W x 2
21W x 2
5W x 5
5W x 2
10W x 1
7.5W x 2
10W x 1
Remarks
Front
* Bulb specification in some model can be different from the above table. Seethe wattage printed on the bulb before replacing burnt bulbs.
N4W8073A
5
4 3
2
1
8–8 TECHNICAL INFORMATION
N5W8002A1211
N5W8001A
4
3
2
5
1
6
Halogen bulb
Halogen bulb
Halogen bulb
1 Headlamp low beam
2 Headlamp high beam
3 Parking lamp
4 Indicator lamp
5 Fog lamp*
6 Side repeater lamp
7 Indicator lamp
8 Brake / tail lamp
9 Reverse lamp
10 Fog lamp
11 Centre high mounted stop lamp
12 Registration plate lamp
Dome lamp
Map light
Luggage lamp
BULB SPECIFICATION (Wagon)
Bulbs
Rear
Interior
Wattages x Quantity
55W x 2
55W x 2
5W x 2
21W x 2
27W x 2
5W x 2
21W x 2
21/5W x 2
21W x 2
21W x 2
5W x 5
5W x 2
10W x 1
7.5W x 2
10W x 1
Remarks
Front
* Bulb specification in some model can be different from the above table. Seethe wattage printed on the bulb before replacing burnt bulbs.
TECHNICAL INFORMATION 8–9
VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONSENGINE
Type
Valvetrain
Displacement (cc) [in3]
Bore x stroke (mm) [in]
Compression ratio
Max. power (Kw/rpm) [hp/rpm]
Max. torque (Nm/rpm) [lb-ft/rpm]
Fuel system
Octane rating
Spark Typeplug Gap (mm) [in]
BatteryRating (V-AH)
Cold cranking amps (CCA)
Alternator (V-A)
Starter (V-Kw)
4-cylinder/in-line
DOHC 16 valve
1,598 [97.5]
79 x 81.5 [3.1 x 3.21]
9.5 : 1
80/5,800 [107.3/5,800]
150/4,000 [110.6/4,000]
Multi-point injection
See the index
BKR6E-11
1.0 ~ 1.1 [0.039 ~ 0.043]
12 - 55
610
12 - 85
12 - 1.2
Engine (1.6 DOHC Gasoline)
Type
Valvetrain
Displacement (cc) [in3]
Bore x stroke (mm) [in]
Compression ratio
Max. power (Kw/rpm) [hp/rpm]
Max. torque (Nm/rpm) [lb-ft/rpm]
Fuel system
Octane rating
Spark Typeplug Gap (mm) [in]
BatteryRating (V-AH)
Cold cranking amps (CCA)
Alternator (V-A)
Starter (V-Kw)
4-cylinder/in-line
DOHC 16 valve
1,399 [85.4]
77.9 x 73.4 [3.07 x 2.89]
9.5 : 1
69.5/6,300 [93.2/6,300]
131/4,400 [96.6/4,400]
Multi-point injection
See the index
BKR6E-11
1.0 ~ 1.1 [0.039 ~ 0.043]
12 - 55
610
12 - 85
12 - 1.2
Engine (1.4 DOHC Gasoline)
8–10 TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Type
Valvetrain
Displacement (cc) [in3]
Bore x stroke (mm) [in]
Compression ratio
Max. power (Kw/rpm) [hp/rpm]
Max. torque (Nm/rpm) [lb-ft/rpm]
Fuel system
Octane rating
Spark Typeplug Gap (mm) [in]
BatteryRating (V-AH)
Cold cranking amps (CCA)
Alternator (V-A)
Starter (V-Kw)
4-cylinder/in-line
DOHC 16 valve
1,796 [109.6]
80.5 x 88.2 [3.17 x 3.47]
9.7 : 1
89/5,800 [119.4/5,800]
169/3,600 [124.7/3,600]
Multi-point injection
See the index
BKUR6ETB
0.7~0.9 [0.028~0.035]
12 - 55
610
12 - 85
12 - 1.2
Engine (1.8 DOHC Gasoline)
Type
Valvetrain
Displacement (cc) [in3]
Bore x stroke (mm) [in]
Compression ratio
Max. power (Kw/rpm) [hp/rpm]
Max. torque (Nm/rpm) [lb-ft/rpm]
Fuel system
Octane rating
BatteryRating (V-AH)
Cold cranking amps (CCA)
Alternator (V-A)
Starter (V-Kw)
4-cylinder/in-line
SOHC 16 valve
1,991 [121.5]
83 x 92 [3.27 x 3.62]
17.5 : 1
110/4,000 [147.5/4,000]
320/2,000 [236/2,000]
Common rail injection
See the index
12 - 90
912
12 - 120
12 - 1.8
Engine (2.0 SOHC Diesel)
TECHNICAL INFORMATION 8–11
1st
2nd
3rd
Gear ratios 4th
5th
Reverse
Final drive ratio
5-Speed Manual Transaxle
DRIVETRAIN
Type
Outside diameter (mm) [in]
Inside diameter (mm) [in]
Thickness (mm) [in]
Clutch (Gasoline / Diesel)
Single plate-dry disc
215 [8.5] / 240 [9.5]
145 [5.7] / 155 [6.1]
8.4 [0.3] / 8.7 [0.3]
1.6D
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
1.8D
3.545
←
←
←
←
←
←
Diesel
2.0S
3.820
1.970
1.304
0.971
0.767
3.615
3.261
1.4D
3.818
2.158
1.481
1.121
0.886
3.333
3.722
Gasoline Drive system
1st
2nd
3rd
Gear ratios4th
Reverse
Counter
Final drive ratio
4-Speed Automatic Transaxle (1.6 DOHC Gasoline)
Front wheel drive
2.875
1.568
1.000
0.697
2.300
1.020
3.750
Drive system
1st
2nd
3rd
Gear ratios4th
Reverse
Final drive ratio
4-Speed Automatic Transaxle (1.8 DOHC Gasoline)
Front wheel drive
2.719
1.487
1.000
0.717
2.529
3.945
8–12 TECHNICAL INFORMATION
McPherson strut
Strut & Dual links
-0° 20´ ± 45´
-1° 00´ ± 45´
4° 00´ ± 45´
0° 00´ ± 10´
0° 12´ ± 10´
Power assisted,Rack & pinion
16:1
380 [15.0]
5.2 [17.1]
Front suspension type
Rear suspension type
CamberFront
Rear
Alignment Caster
(Unloaded)Toe-in
Front
Rear
Type
Overall gear ratio
Steering Steering wheeldiameter (mm) [in]
Minimum turningradius (m) [ft]
Chassis
CHASSIS
Drive system
1st
2nd
3rd
Gear ratios4th
5th
Reverse
Final drive ratio
5-Speed Automatic Transaxle (2.0 SOHC Diesel)
Front wheel drive
4.575
2.979
1.947
1.318
1.000
5.024
2.700
TECHNICAL INFORMATION 8–13
Type
Front wheel
Rear wheel
Brake system
Dual-diagonal split
Ventilated disc
Disc
9.5" [241.3]
7"+8" [177.8+203.2]
BRAKE SYSTEM
195/55 R15 6J x 15 210 [30] 210 [30]
4T x 15 420 [60] 420 [60]
Wheel and tire (NB & HB)
WHEEL AND TIRE
Tire Wheel Tire Pressure (kPa) [psi]
size dimension Front Rear
CAPACITIES
Exterior dimensions (HB/NB)
4,295 [169.1] / 4,515 [177.8]
1,725 [67.9] / ←
1,445 [56.9] / ←
2,600 [102.4] / ←
1,480 [58.3] / ←
1,480 [58.3] / ←
DIMENSIONS
Overall length (mm) [in]
Overall width (mm) [in]
Overall height (mm) [in]
Wheel base (mm) [in]
Track (mm) [in]Front
Rear
Boostersingle (in) [mm]
tandem (in) [mm]
Wheel and tire (Wagon)
Tire
size
Wheel
dimension
Tire Pressure (kPa) [psi]
195/55 R15
125/70 D15(Temporary)
6J x 15
4T x 15
Up to 4 occupants Over 4 occupants
Front Rear Front Rear
210 [30]
420 [60]
210 [30]
420 [60]
240 [35]
420 [60]
240 [35]
420 [60]
125/70 D15(Temporary)
Capacities
Fuel tank (L) [UK gal]
Engine oil (L)
(including oil filter)
Coolant (L)
Capacities
1.6D
←
←
←
1.8D
←
←
7.5
Diesel
2.0S
←
6.5
8
1.4D
60 [13.2]
3.75
7.2
Gasoline
8–14 TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Curb weight(Kg) [lb]
Gross vehicleweight (Kg) [lb]
M/T
A/T
M/T
A/T
M/T
1,180~1,230 [2,601.5~2,711.7]
1,190~1,240 [2,623.5~2,733.7]
1,175~1,225 [2,590.4~2,700.7]
1,185~1,235 [2,612.5~2,722.7]
1,250~1,300 [2,755.8~2,866.0]
1,665 [3,670.7]
1,675 [3,692.7]
1,650 [3,637.6]
1,660 [3,659.7]
1,765 [3,891.2]
4 NB
5 HB
Wagon
M/T
A/T
M/T
A/T
M/T
4 NB
5 HB
Wagon
4,580 [180.3]
1,725 [67.9]
1,460 [57.5]
1,500 [59.1] (W/roof rack)
2,600 [102.4]
1,480 [58.3]
1,480 [58.3]
Exterior dimensions (Wagon)
WEIGHT
Weight (1.4 DOHC Gasoline)
Curb weight(Kg) [lb]
Gross vehicleweight (Kg) [lb]
4 NB
5 HB
M/T
M/T
1,175~1,225 [2,590.4~2,700.7]
1,170~1,220 [2,579.4~2,689.6]1,660 [3,659.7]
1,645 [3,626.6]4 NB
5 HB
Weight (1.6 DOHC Gasoline)
Overall length (mm) [in]
Overall width (mm) [in]
Overall height (mm) [in]
Wheel base (mm) [in]
Track (mm) [in]Front
Rear
TECHNICAL INFORMATION 8–15
Curb weight(Kg) [lb]
Gross vehicleweight (Kg) [lb]
M/T
A/T
M/T
A/T
M/T
A/T
1,210~1,260 [2,667.6~2,777.8]
1,235~1,285 [2,722.7~2,832.9]
1,205~1,255 [2,656.6~2,766.8]
1,230~1,280 [2,711.7~2,821.9]
1,280~1,330 [2,821.9~2,932.1]
1,305~1,355 [2,877.0~2,987.3]
1,695 [3,736.8]
1,720 [3,791.9]
1,680 [3,703.8]
1,705 [3,758.9]
1,795 [3,957.3]
1,820 [4,012.4]
4 NB
5 HB
Wagon
M/T
A/T
M/T
A/T
M/T
A/T
4 NB
5 HB
Wagon
Weight (1.8 DOHC Gasoline)
Curb weight
(Kg) [lb]
(With driver)
Gross vehicleweight (Kg) [lb]
M/T
A/T
M/T
A/T
M/T
A/T
1,360~1,410 [2,998.3~3,108.5]
1,370~1,420 [3,020.3~3,130.6]
1,355~1,405 [2,987.3~3,097.5]
1,365~1,415 [3,009.3~3,119.5]
1,430~1,480 [3,152.6~3,262.8]
1,440~1,490 [3,174.6~3,284.9]
1,770 [3,902.2]
1,780 [3,924.2]
1,755 [3,869.1]
1,765 [3,891.2]
1,870 [4,122.6]
1,880 [4,144.7]
4 NB
5 HB
Wagon
M/T
A/T
M/T
A/T
M/T
A/T
4 NB
5 HB
Wagon
Weight (2.0 SOHC Diesel)
8–16 TECHNICAL INFORMATION
175 [108.7]
187 [116.2]
175 [108.7]
194 [120.5]
184 [114.3]
186 [115.6]
188 [116.8]
PERFORMANCE
Performance
Max. speed(Km/h) [mph]
M/T
M/T
A/T
M/T
A/T
M/T
A/T
1.4 DOHC
1.6 DOHC
1.8 DOHC
2.0 SOHC
Gasoline
Diesel
INDEX 9–1
INDEX9
9–2 INDEX
AABS warning lamp ........................ 2-9Accessory power outlet ................ 2-46Adding brake/clutch fluid ............ 6-14Adjusting the mirrors .................... 3-7Adjusting the steering wheel ....... 3-10Air bag ........................................ 1-19
Driver’s air bag ...................... 1-19Front passenger’s air bag ....... 1-19Side air bag ........................... 1-21Warning lamp .......................... 2-9
Air cleaner ................................... 6-30Air conditioner filter .................... 6-41Air conditioning ............................ 4-6Air vents ........................................ 4-2Always wear your safety belts ...... 1-2Antenna ....................................... 2-56Anti-lock brake system ................ 3-24
Braking with ABS .................. 3-25Warning lamp .......................... 2-9
Aquaplaning ................................ 3-30Ashtrays ....................................... 2-48
Front ashtray .......................... 2-48Rear ashtray .......................... 2-48
Assist grip .................................... 2-53Audio system
RDS radio, cassettes andCD-changer ............................ 4-17
RDS radio and CD ................ 4-39Remote control system ........... 4-53
Automatic climate control ........... 4-10Automatic transaxle ........... 3-14, 3-16
Automatic transaxlefluid ............................ 6-19, 21, 23Checking automatictransaxle fluid level ... 6-19, 21, 23Emergency shiftingprocedure ............................... 3-21Hold mode ............................. 3-20Hold mode indicator ............. 2-15Winter mode .......................... 3-21Winter mode indicator ........... 2-25
Auxiliury heater ................. 4-10, 6-46
BBattery ......................................... 6-33
Jump starting ........................... 5-7Saver ...................................... 2-22Transmitter batteryreplacement ............................ 2-33
Body hits ....................................... 3-4Bonnet ......................................... 2-42Boot lid ....................................... 2-40Boot lid open warning lamp ....... 2-22Boot lid release button ................ 2-40
Brake and clutch fluid ................. 6-14Adding brake/ clutch fluid ..... 6-14
Brakes .......................................... 3-22Anti-lock brake system........... 3-24Brake pad wear indicator ...... 3-23Brake pedal ............................ 6-35Brake system warning lamp .. 2-10Handbrake ............................. 3-23Overheated brakes ................. 3-22Wet brakes ............................. 3-22
Brake-transaxle shift interlock(BTSI) ........................................ 3-16
Bulb specification .......................... 8-6
CCatalytic converter ...................... 6-36Central door locking system ....... 2-36Changing engine oil and filter ...... 6-9Charging system
warning lamp ......................... 2-112Child restraint ............................. 1-11Child security door lock .............. 2-37Cigarette lighter and
accessory power outlet ............. 2-46Climate control
Air distribution mode buttons .. 4-4Control panel ........................... 4-3Fan control knob ...................... 4-4
INDEX 9–3
Recirculation mode button ....... 4-6Temperature control knob ....... 4-3
Clutch pedal ................................ 6-35Coin storage ................................ 2-51Console box ................................. 2-51Coolant ........................................ 6-12Cruise control .............................. 2-59Cup holder ................................... 2-49
DDefrosting and demisting ..... 2-29, 4-9Diesel fusel filter ......................... 6-18Diesel particulate filter ................ 6-28Digital clock ............................... 2-45Dimmer switch ............................ 2-30Dome lamp ................................. 2-44
Bulb replacement ................... 6-55Door locks ................................... 2-35
Central door locking system .. 2-36Child security door lock ........ 2-37
Door open warning lamp ............ 2-14Drive belt .................................... 6-32Driving precautions ....................... 3-2Driving tips ................................. 3-27Driving your vehicle ................... 3-15
EElectric folding mirror .................. 3-9Electric sunroof ........................... 2-44
Sliding the sunroof ................... 2-45Tilting the sunroof .................... 2-45
Electric window ........................... 2-38Auto down ............................. 2-38Lock button ............................ 2-39
Emergency towing ....................... 5-10Engine braking ............................ 3-27Engine compartment ..................... 6-5Engine exhaust ............................ 3-35Engine oil ...................................... 6-8
Changing engine oil and filter . 6-9Checking engine oil level ........ 6-8Engine oil pressure warninglamp ....................................... 2-12Engine oil specification ............ 8-5
Environmental protection ............ 3-36
FFilling the fuel tank ....................... 3-6Floor net ...................................... 2-56Fluid chart ..................................... 8-4Folding rear seatback .................. 1-18Front Fog lamp switch ................ 2-24
Bulb replacement ................... 6-50Front fog lamp indicator ....... 2-17
Front passenger seat undertray ... 2-52Front seat occupants ...................... 1-6Front seats ................................... 1-16
Driver’s seat heightadjustment .............................. 1-17Lumbar support ..................... 1-17Reclining adjustment ............. 1-16Slide adjustment ..................... 1-16
Fuel ................................................ 3-4Filling the fuel tank ................. 3-6Fuel filling from drums orportable containers .................. 3-7Fuel recommendations ............. 3-4
Fuel gauge ..................................... 2-8Fuses ............................................ 6-42
Engine room fuse block ......... 6-45Fuse block .............................. 6-42Interior fuse block .................. 6-44
GGlove box ................................... 2-49
Glove box cooling .................... 2-50
HHandbrake ......................... 3-23, 6-28
Winter parking tip ................. 3-24Hazard warning flasherbutton ..................................... 2-29
9–4 INDEX
Hazard warning light button ...... 2-29Head restraints ............................ 1-15Headlamp
Bulb replacement ................... 6-47Headlamp levelling switch .... 2-30
Heating ......................................... 4-8High beam indicator ................... 2-18High beam switch ....................... 2-23Hold mode .................................. 3-20
Hold mode indicator ............. 2-15Horn ............................................ 2-49How to change a flat tyre ............ 5-3
IIdentification numbers ................... 8-2Ignition switch ............................. 3-11Immobiliser ................................. 3-29Indicators and warning lamps ..... 2-29Inside rear view mirror ................. 3-9Instruments cluster .................. 2-5, 2-6Instruments and controls - Quick view ............................ 2-3,4Interior courtesy lamps ................ 2-43
Dome lamp .............................. 2-44Map light ................................. 2-44
JJump starting ................................. 5-7
KKeyless entry system ................... 2-32
Door lock ............................... 2-32Door unlock ........................... 2-33Transmitter ............................. 2-33
Keys ............................................. 2-31
LLamps .......................................... 6-47
Reverse, tail, brake and rearindicator and rear fog lamps . 6-51Dome lamp/map light ........... 6-55Front fog lamps ...................... 6-50Front turn signal lamps ......... 6-49Headlamps ............................. 6-47High mounted stop lamp ....... 6-53Registration plate lamp ......... 6-54Luggage compartment lamp .. 6-55Sidelights ................................ 6-48Side turn signal lamps ........... 6-50
Light switch ................................. 2-22Low fuel level warning lamp ........ 2-9Lower child restraint anchors ..... 1-13Lower deposit box ....................... 2-51
Luggage storage area .................. 2-56Floor net ................................ 2-56Luggage compartment cover . 2-57Side deposit box ..................... 2-57Under floor storage ................ 2-57
MMalfunction indicator lamp ........ 2-13Manual transaxle ............... 3-13, 3-15
Manual transaxle fluid .......... 6-17Checking manual transaxlefluid level ............................... 6-17
Manual windows ........................ 2-39Map light .................................... 2-44
Bulb replacement ...................... 6-55Mirrors .......................................... 3-7
OOctane rating ................................ 3-4Odometer / Trip odometer ............ 2-7Operating tips for ventilation system ..................................... 4-16Outside rearview mirror ............... 3-7Outside rear view mirror
defroster button ......................... 2-29Overheating ................................. 5-12
INDEX 9–5
PParking the vehicle ...................... 3-28Passing light switch ..................... 2-28Power outside rear view mirror .... 3-8Power steering fluid .................... 6-26
Adding power steering fluid ... 6-26Checking power steeringfluid level ............................... 6-26
Pregnant women andsafety belts ................................ 1-11
RRain sensor .................................. 2-26Rear fog lamp switch .................. 2-24
Bulb replacement ................... 6-51Rear fog lamp indicator ........ 2-17
Rear seats .................................... 1-18Folding ................................... 1-18
Rear seat occupants ...................... 1-6Rear window defroster button ..... 2-29Recirculation ................................. 4-6Remote control
Keyless entry system .............. 2-32Rocking your vehicle .................. 5-11Roof rack .................................... 2-58Running-in ..................................... 3-2
SSafety belt
Care ....................................... 6-57Maintain your safety belts ....... 1-8Pregnant women and safety belts ......................... 1-11Rear centre safety belt ............. 1-8Safety belt reminder ............... 2-17Satety belt height adjustment . 1-10Safety belt pretensioner ............ 1-9Safety belt warning chime ....... 1-6Three point safety belts ........... 1-6
Seatback shopping hook .............. 2-52Seat heater switch ....................... 2-59Security barrier net ..................... 2-54Selector lever position indicator .. 2-15Severe conditions ........................... 7-2Side air bags ............................... 1-21Side deposit box .......................... 2-57Spare tyre, jack and vehicle tools . 5-2Spark plugs ................................. 6-31Specifications ................................. 8-6
Bulb specifications ................... 8-6Vehicle specifications ............... 8-9
Speedo meter ................................. 2-7Speed sensitive power steering system (SSPS) .......................... 3-11
SSPS warning lamp .................. 2-14
Starting the engine ...................... 3-12Starting the engine with jumper cables ............................ 5-7Sunglass holder ........................... 2-52Sun visors .................................... 2-53Supplemental restraint system ..... 1-19Switches and controls .................. 2-17
TTachometer .................................... 2-7Tailgate ....................................... 2-41Tailgate window wiper and
washer ...................................... 2-28Temperature gauge ........................ 2-8Three point safety belts ................. 1-6Towing the vehicle ........................ 5-9Traction control system ............... 3-25
Warning lamp ........................ 2-16Trailer towing ............................. 3-31Transaxle
Automatic transaxle ...... 3-14, 3-16Manual transaxle .......... 3-13, 3-15
Transmitter battery replacement . 2-34Turn signal lever ......................... 2-23Turn signal/ hazard warning flasher indicators ..................... 2-18Turbocharger system ................... 3-26
9–6 INDEX
TyreChanging a flat tyre ................ 5-3Chains .................................... 6-40Inflation pressure ...................... 8-9Rotation ................................. 6-39Temporary spare tyre ............ 6-40Tread wear indicator ............. 6-38Winter tyres ........................... 6-39
VVehicle care ................................. 6-55
Care and cleaning of the exterior ......................... 6-58Care and cleaning of the interior ......................... 6-56Cleaning agents ...................... 6-55Cleaning the outside of the windscreen ................... 6-58Corrosion protection .............. 6-59Glass surfaces ........................ 6-57Safety belt care ...................... 6-57
Vehicle specifications ..................... 8-9Ventilation ..................................... 4-9
WWheels and tyres ......................... 6-37Windscreen heating ..................... 2-30Windscreen washer ...................... 2-27
Windscreen washer fluid ........ 6-27Windscreen wipers.............2-25, 6-28
Automatic wipe with rainsensor ..................................... 2-26